Casio ClassPad OS Version 3.03 Bedienungsanleitung

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941

Zur Seite of

Richtige Gebrauchsanleitung

Die Vorschriften verpflichten den Verkäufer zur Übertragung der Gebrauchsanleitung Casio ClassPad OS Version 3.03 an den Erwerber, zusammen mit der Ware. Eine fehlende Anleitung oder falsche Informationen, die dem Verbraucher übertragen werden, bilden eine Grundlage für eine Reklamation aufgrund Unstimmigkeit des Geräts mit dem Vertrag. Rechtsmäßig lässt man das Anfügen einer Gebrauchsanleitung in anderer Form als Papierform zu, was letztens sehr oft genutzt wird, indem man eine grafische oder elektronische Anleitung von Casio ClassPad OS Version 3.03, sowie Anleitungsvideos für Nutzer beifügt. Die Bedingung ist, dass ihre Form leserlich und verständlich ist.

Was ist eine Gebrauchsanleitung?

Das Wort kommt vom lateinischen „instructio”, d.h. ordnen. Demnach kann man in der Anleitung Casio ClassPad OS Version 3.03 die Beschreibung der Etappen der Vorgehensweisen finden. Das Ziel der Anleitung ist die Belehrung, Vereinfachung des Starts, der Nutzung des Geräts oder auch der Ausführung bestimmter Tätigkeiten. Die Anleitung ist eine Sammlung von Informationen über ein Gegenstand/eine Dienstleistung, ein Hinweis.

Leider widmen nicht viele Nutzer ihre Zeit der Gebrauchsanleitung Casio ClassPad OS Version 3.03. Eine gute Gebrauchsanleitung erlaubt nicht nur eine Reihe zusätzlicher Funktionen des gekauften Geräts kennenzulernen, sondern hilft dabei viele Fehler zu vermeiden.

Was sollte also eine ideale Gebrauchsanleitung beinhalten?

Die Gebrauchsanleitung Casio ClassPad OS Version 3.03 sollte vor allem folgendes enthalten:
- Informationen über technische Daten des Geräts Casio ClassPad OS Version 3.03
- Den Namen des Produzenten und das Produktionsjahr des Geräts Casio ClassPad OS Version 3.03
- Grundsätze der Bedienung, Regulierung und Wartung des Geräts Casio ClassPad OS Version 3.03
- Sicherheitszeichen und Zertifikate, die die Übereinstimmung mit entsprechenden Normen bestätigen

Warum lesen wir keine Gebrauchsanleitungen?

Der Grund dafür ist die fehlende Zeit und die Sicherheit, was die bestimmten Funktionen der gekauften Geräte angeht. Leider ist das Anschließen und Starten von Casio ClassPad OS Version 3.03 zu wenig. Eine Anleitung beinhaltet eine Reihe von Hinweisen bezüglich bestimmter Funktionen, Sicherheitsgrundsätze, Wartungsarten (sogar das, welche Mittel man benutzen sollte), eventueller Fehler von Casio ClassPad OS Version 3.03 und Lösungsarten für Probleme, die während der Nutzung auftreten könnten. Immerhin kann man in der Gebrauchsanleitung die Kontaktnummer zum Service Casio finden, wenn die vorgeschlagenen Lösungen nicht wirksam sind. Aktuell erfreuen sich Anleitungen in Form von interessanten Animationen oder Videoanleitungen an Popularität, die den Nutzer besser ansprechen als eine Broschüre. Diese Art von Anleitung gibt garantiert, dass der Nutzer sich das ganze Video anschaut, ohne die spezifizierten und komplizierten technischen Beschreibungen von Casio ClassPad OS Version 3.03 zu überspringen, wie es bei der Papierform passiert.

Warum sollte man Gebrauchsanleitungen lesen?

In der Gebrauchsanleitung finden wir vor allem die Antwort über den Bau sowie die Möglichkeiten des Geräts Casio ClassPad OS Version 3.03, über die Nutzung bestimmter Accessoires und eine Reihe von Informationen, die erlauben, jegliche Funktionen und Bequemlichkeiten zu nutzen.

Nach dem gelungenen Kauf des Geräts, sollte man einige Zeit für das Kennenlernen jedes Teils der Anleitung von Casio ClassPad OS Version 3.03 widmen. Aktuell sind sie genau vorbereitet oder übersetzt, damit sie nicht nur verständlich für die Nutzer sind, aber auch ihre grundliegende Hilfs-Informations-Funktion erfüllen.

Inhaltsverzeichnis der Gebrauchsanleitungen

  • Seite 1

    ClassPad 330 ClassPad OS Version 3.03 User’s Guide E CASIO Education website URL http://edu.casio.com ClassPad website URL http://edu.casio.com/products/classpad/ ClassPad register URL http://edu.casio.com/dl/[...]

  • Seite 2

    GUIDELINES LAID DOWN BY FCC RULES FOR USE OF THE UNIT IN THE U.S.A. (not applicable to other areas). NO TICE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential i[...]

  • Seite 3

    20060301 20080201 Getting Read y This section contains important information you need to know before using the ClassPad for the fi rst time. 1. Unpac king When unpacking your ClassPad, check to make sure that all of the items shown here are included. If anything is missing, contact your original retailer immediately. Quick Start Guide ClassPad Sty[...]

  • Seite 4

    20060301 2. Attac hing and Removing the Fr ont Cover u T o remove the fr ont cover Before using the ClassPad, remove the front cover and attach it to the back. u T o attach the fr ont cover When you are not using the ClassPad, attach the front cover to the front. 2 Getting Ready Important! • Always attach the front cover to the ClassPad whenever [...]

  • Seite 5

    20060301 4. Replacing Batteries and Setting Up the ClassP ad u ClassPad Operation (1) Making sure that you do not accidentally press the o key, attach the front cover to the ClassPad and then turn the ClassPad over. Remove the battery cover from the ClassPad by pulling with your finger at the point marked 1 . (2) Load the four batteries that come [...]

  • Seite 6

    20060301 b. Tap the center of each of the four cross marks as they appear on the display. • If the Touch Panel Alignment screen does not appear, use the stylus to press the P button on the back of the ClassPad. Important! • It may take a little time for your ClassPad to start up after you press the P button. (6) Adjust the display contrast. a. [...]

  • Seite 7

    20060301 (7) Specify the display language. a. On the list that appears, tap the language you want to use. • Y ou can selec t Germ an, En glish, Spani sh, Fr ench, or Portuguese. b. When the language you want is selected, tap [Set]. • Tapping [Cancel] selects English and advances to the next dialog box. (8) Specify the soft keyboard key arrangem[...]

  • Seite 8

    20060301 20070301 6 Getting Ready (10) Configure power properties. a. Configure the Power Save Mode and Auto Power Off settings. • See “Power Saving Mode” and “Auto Power Off” on page 16-6-1 for details about these settings. b. When the configurations are the way you want, tap [Set]. • Tapping [Cancel] selects “1 day” for [Power [...]

  • Seite 9

    20060301 20070301 Handling Pr ecautions • Your ClassPad is made of precision components. Never try to take it apart. • Avoid dropping your ClassPad and subjecting it to strong impact. • Do not store the ClassPad or leave it in areas exposed to high temperatures or humidity, or large amounts of dust. When exposed to low temperatures, the Class[...]

  • Seite 10

    20060301 20080201 Be sure to keep physical recor ds of all impor tant data! Low battery power or incorrect replacement of the batteries that power the ClassPad can cause the data stored in memory to be corrupted or even lost entirely. Stored data can also be affected by strong electrostatic charge or strong impact. It is up to you to keep back up c[...]

  • Seite 11

    20060301 20080201 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • [...]

  • Seite 12

    20060301 Contents Getting Ready 1. Unpacking ..................................................................................................... 1 2. Attaching and Removing the Fr ont Cover ................................................. 2 3. Using the Stylus ......................................................................................[...]

  • Seite 13

    20060301 1-7 V ariables and Folders .......................................................................... 1-7-1 Folder Types ....................................................................................................... 1-7-1 Variable Types ...............................................................................................[...]

  • Seite 14

    20060301 20080201 3 Contents 2-6 Matrix and V ector Calculations ............................................................ 2-6-1 Inputting Matrix Data .......................................................................................... 2-6-1 Performing Matrix Calculations ....................................................................[...]

  • Seite 15

    20060301 2-12 Using Probability ................................................................................ 2-12-1 Starting Up Probability ......................................................................................2-12-2 Probability Menus and Buttons .........................................................................2-12-2 Usi[...]

  • Seite 16

    20060301 3-7 Using T race ............................................................................................ 3-7-1 Using Trace to Read Graph Coordinates ...........................................................3-7-1 Linking Trace to a Number Table .......................................................................3-7-3 Generating Nu[...]

  • Seite 17

    20060301 5-5 Other 3D Graph Application Functions ............................................... 5-5-1 Using Trace to Read Graph Coordinates ...........................................................5-5-1 Inserting Text into a 3D Graph Window ..............................................................5-5-1 Calculating a z -value for Particular[...]

  • Seite 18

    20060301 7-5 Graphing Paired-V ariable Statistical Data........................................... 7-5-1 Drawing a Scatter Plot and xy Line Graph .........................................................7-5-1 Drawing a Regression Graph .............................................................................7-5-2 Graphing Previously Calculated [...]

  • Seite 19

    20060301 8-3 Editing Figures ...................................................................................... 8-3-1 Selecting and Deselecting Figures .....................................................................8-3-1 Moving and Copying Figures ..............................................................................8-3-3 Pinning [...]

  • Seite 20

    20060301 10-4 W orking with eActivity Files ............................................................... 10-4-1 Opening an Existing eActivity ...........................................................................10-4-1 Browsing the Contents of an eActivity ..............................................................10-4-2 Editing the Cont[...]

  • Seite 21

    20060301 12-3 Debugging a Pr ogram ......................................................................... 12-3-1 Debugging After an Error Message Appears ....................................................12-3-1 Debugging a Program Following Unexpected Results .....................................12-3-1 Modifying an Existing Program to Create a[...]

  • Seite 22

    20060301 Cut and Copy .................................................................................................. 13-4-11 Paste .............................................................................................................. 13-4-11 Specifying Text or Calculation as the Data Type for a Particular Cell ............13-4-13 Using [...]

  • Seite 23

    20060301 14-5 Drawing f ( x ) T ype Function Graphs and P arametric Function Graphs.................................................................................................. 14-5-1 Drawing an f ( x ) Type Function Graph .............................................................. 14-5-1 Drawing a Parametric Function Graph ................[...]

  • Seite 24

    20060301 13 Contents 15-8 Day Count ............................................................................................ 15-8-1 Day Count Fields .............................................................................................. 15-8-1 Financial Application Default Setup for Examples ............................................15[...]

  • Seite 25

    20060301 20070301 14 Contents 16-8 Specifying the Font Set ...................................................................... 16-8-1 16-9 Specifying the Alphabetic Keyboar d Arrangement ......................... 16-9-1 16-10 Optimizing “Flash R OM” ................................................................... 16-10-1 16-11 Specifying [...]

  • Seite 26

    20060301 About This User’ s Guide This section explains the symbols that are used in this user’s guide to represent keys, stylus operations, display elements, and other items you encounter while operating your ClassPad. ClassP ad Keypad and Icon P anel 1 Keypad 2 Icon panel 3 Cursor key 1 Keypad ClassPad keypad keys are represented by illustrat[...]

  • Seite 27

    20060301 On-screen Ke ys, Men us, and Other Contr ollers 4 Menu bar 4 Menu bar Menu names and commands are indicated in text by enclosing them inside of brackets. The following examples show typical menu operations. Example 1: Tap the O menu and then tap [Keyboard]. 5 Toolbar 6 Soft keyboard Tabs Example 2: Tap [Analysis], [Sketch], and then [Line][...]

  • Seite 28

    20060301 5 T oolbar Toolbar button operations are indicated by illustrations that look like the button you need to tap. Example 1: Tap $ to graph the functions. Example 2: Tap ( to open the Stat Editor window. 6 Soft keyboar d Key operations on the soft keyboards that appear when you press the k key are indicated by illustrations that look like the[...]

  • Seite 29

    20060301 Getting Acquainted 1-1 General Guide 1-2 T urning P ower On and Off 1-3 Using the Icon P anel 1-4 Built-in Applications 1-5 Built-in Application Basic Operations 1-6 Input 1-7 V ariables and Folder s 1-8 Using the V ariable Manager 1-9 Configuring Application Format Settings Chapter 1[...]

  • Seite 30

    20060301 1-1 General Guide Front 1-1-1 General Guide Side Back 1 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 0 @ # $ = ( ) , (–) x z ^ y � ÷ − + EXE K ey boar d ON/ OF F Clea r smMrSh 7 4 1 0 8 5 2 9 6 3 . EXP ! P[...]

  • Seite 31

    20060301 General Guide The numbers next to each of the items below correspond to the numbers in the illustration on page 1-1-1. Front 1 T ouch screen The touch screen shows calculation formulas, calculation results, graphs and other information. The stylus that comes with the ClassPad can be used to input data and perform other operations by tappin[...]

  • Seite 32

    20060301 9 Keypad Use these keys to input the values and operators marked on them. See “1-6 Input” for details. 0 E key Press this key to execute a calculation operation or enter a return. Side ! 3-pin data communication port Connect the data communication cable here to communicate with another ClassPad unit or a CASIO Data Analyzer. See “Cha[...]

  • Seite 33

    20060301 Important! • Be sure that you do not misplace or lose the stylus. Keep the stylus in the holder on the right side of the ClassPad whenever you are not using it. • Do not allow the tip of the stylus to become damaged. Using a stylus with a damaged tip to perform touch screen operations can damage the touch screen. • Use only the stylu[...]

  • Seite 34

    20060301 1-2 T urning P ower On and Off T urning P ower On You can turn on the ClassPad either by pressing the o key or by tapping the touch screen with the stylus. • Turning on the ClassPad (while it is in the sleep state) displays the window that was on the display when you last turned it off. See “Resume Function” below. • Note that you [...]

  • Seite 35

    20060301 1-2-2 T urning Po wer On and Off Limiting the Duration of the Sleep State You can use the [Power Save Mode] setting (page 16-6-1) to limit the duration of the sleep state that is entered by the Resume function. If you have “1 day” specified for [Power Save Mode], for example, the ClassPad remains in the sleep state for one day after p[...]

  • Seite 36

    20060301 1-3 Using the Icon P anel The icon panel of seven permanent icons is located below the touch screen. Tapping an icon executes the function assigned to it. The table below explains what you can do with the icon panel icons. Function When you want to do this: T ap this icon: Display the O menu to configure settings, switch to the applicatio[...]

  • Seite 37

    20060301 T o perf orm this type of operation: Select this icon: See Chapter: 2 10 7 13 3 6 4 5 8 9 1 1 12 • Access the eActivity function • General calculations, including function calculations • Matrix calculations • Computer Algebra System • Create a list • Perform statistical calculations • Draw a statistical graph • Input data i[...]

  • Seite 38

    20060301 Starting a Built-in Application Perform the steps below to start a built-in application. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the icon panel, tap m to display the application menu. (2) If you cannot see the icon of the application you want on the menu, tap the scroll buttons or drag the scroll bar to bring other icons into view. (3) Tap an icon to [...]

  • Seite 39

    20060301 • Displaying applications according to group (Additional Applications, All Applications) See “Using Application Groups” below. • Moving or swapping icons See “Moving an Icon” below, and “Swapping Two Icons” on page 1-4-4. • Deleting an application See “Deleting an Application” on page α -2-1. k Using Application Grou[...]

  • Seite 40

    20060301 u ClassPad Operation (1) On the icon panel, tap m to display the application menu. (2) Tap at the top left of the application menu. • This opens a menu of setting options. (3) Tap [Move Icon]. (4) Tap the icon you want to move ( J in this example). • This selects the icon. (5) Tap the icon that you want the first icon to follow ( C in[...]

  • Seite 41

    20060301 1-5 Built-in Application Basic Operations This section explains basic information and operations that are common to all of the built-in applications. Application Window The following shows the basic configuration of a built-in application window. Using a Dual Window Display Many applications split the display between an upper window and a[...]

  • Seite 42

    20060301 When using two windows, the currently selected window (the one where you can perform operations) is called the “active window”. The menu bar, toolbar, and status bar contents are all appl icable to the a ctive window. T he active windo w is indicated by a thick boun dary around it. u T o switch the active windo w While a dual window is[...]

  • Seite 43

    20060301 20080201 (3) Tap [lim]. • This inputs “lim(”. Example 1: Choosing the [Edit] menu’s [Copy] item u ClassP ad Operation (1) Tap [Edit]. (2) Tap [Copy]. Example 2: Choosing [lim], which is on the [Calculation] submenu of the [Action] menu. u ClassP ad Operation (1) Tap [Action]. (2) Tap [Calculation]. 1-5-3 Built-in Application Basic [...]

  • Seite 44

    20060301 Using the O Menu The O menu appears at the top left of the window of each application, except for the System application. You can access the O menu by tapping s on the icon panel, or by tapping the menu bar’s O menu. k O Menu Items The following describes all of the items that appear on the O menu. 1 Tapping [Variable Manager] starts up [...]

  • Seite 45

    20060301 k Using the O Menu to Access Windows Most ClassPad applications support simultaneous display of two windows. When two windows are on the display, the one with a thick selection boundary around it is the active window. The displayed menu and toolbar are the ones for the currently active window. You can use the O menu to change the active wi[...]

  • Seite 46

    20060301 1-5-6 Built-in Application Basic Operations Using Check Bo xes A check box shows the current status of a dialog box option that can be turned on or off. An option is turned on (selected) when its check box has a check mark inside it. An option is turned off when a check box is cleared. Tapping a check box toggles the option on (checked) an[...]

  • Seite 47

    20060301 1-5-7 Built-in Application Basic Operations Using Option Buttons Option buttons are used on dialog boxes that present you with a list of options from which you can select only one. A black option button indicates the currently selected option, while the buttons of the options that are not selected are white. Option buttons also appear on m[...]

  • Seite 48

    20060301 Using the T oolbar The toolbar is located directly underneath the menu bar of an application window. It contains the buttons for the currently active window. k T oggling between Multiple T oolbars With some applications, not all of the buttons can fit on a single toolbar. When this happens, the buttons that cannot fit are placed onto a s[...]

  • Seite 49

    20060301 Interpreting Status Bar Information The status bar appears along the bottom of the window of each application. 1 Information about current application Tip • You can change the configuration of a setting indicated in the status bar by tapping it. Tapping “Cplx” (indicating complex number calculations) while the Main application is ru[...]

  • Seite 50

    20060301 Break dialog box 1-5-10 Built-in Application Basic Operations Example: To pause a graphing operation and then resume it u ClassP ad Operation (1) Use the Graph & Table application to draw a graph. • For details about graphing, see “Chapter 3 – Using the Graph & Table Application”. (2) While the graph is being drawn, pres[...]

  • Seite 51

    20060301 1-6 Input You can input data on the ClassPad using its keypad or by using the on-screen soft keyboard. Virtually all data input required by your ClassPad can be performed using the soft keyboard. The keypad keys are used for input of frequently used data like numbers, arithmetic operators, etc. Using the Soft Ke yboard The soft keyboard is[...]

  • Seite 52

    20060301 k Soft Ke yboard Styles There are four different soft keyboard styles as described below. • Math (mth) Keyboar d Pressing k will display the keyboard that you last displayed while working in that application. If you quit the application and go into another application, then the 9 (default) soft keyboard appears. You can use the math (mth[...]

  • Seite 53

    20060301 k Selecting a Soft Ke yboard Style Tap one of the tabs along the top of the soft keyboard ( 9 , 0 , ( , or ) ) to select the keyboard style you want. 1-6-3 Input To display t he 2D keyboard Tap here. Input Basics This section includes a number of examples that illustrate how to perform basic input procedures. All of the procedures assume t[...]

  • Seite 54

    20060301 1-6-4 Input Example 2: To simplify 2 (5 + 4) ÷ (23 × 5) u ClassPad Operation Using the keypad keys c2(5+4)/(23*5)E Using the soft keyboar d Tap the keys of the math (mth) keyboard or the 2D keyboard to input the calculation expression. c 9 (or ) ) c(f+e)/(cd*f) w Tip • As shown in Example 1 and Example 2, you can input simple arithmeti[...]

  • Seite 55

    20060301 u T o delete an unneeded key operation Use d and e to move the cursor to the location immediately to the right of the key operation you want to delete, and then press K . Each press of K deletes one command to the left of the cursor. Example: To change the expression 369 × × 2 to 369 × 2 (1) c369**2 (2) d K Tip • You can m ove the cur[...]

  • Seite 56

    20060301 u T o insert new input into the middle of an existing calculation e xpression Use d or e to move the cursor to the location where you want to insert new input, and then input what you want. Example: To change 2.36 2 to sin(2.36 2 ) (1) c 9 c.dg x (2) dddddd (3) T s Tip • You can m ove the cursor withou t using the cursor key by tapping a[...]

  • Seite 57

    20060301 k Using the Clipboard f or Copy and P aste You can copy (or cut) a function, command, or other input to the ClassPad’s clipboard, and then paste the clipboard contents at another location. u T o copy character s (1) Drag the stylus across the characters you want to copy to select them. (2) On the soft keyboard, tap G . • This puts a co[...]

  • Seite 58

    20060301 1-6-8 Input u Copying and pasting in the message bo x The “messag e box” is a 1 -line i nput a nd disp lay are a unde r the G raph wi ndow ( see Cha pter 3) . You can use the two buttons to the right of the message box to copy the message box contents ( G button), or to paste the clipboard contents to the message box ( H button). Co[...]

  • Seite 59

    20060301 1-6-9 Input u T key set Tapping the T key displays keys for inputting trigonometric functions, and changes the T softkey to I . You can tap this key to toggle between T and the default 9 keyboard. Tapping the = (hyperbolic) key switches to a key set for inputting hyperbolic functions. Tap the = key again to return to the regular T key set.[...]

  • Seite 60

    20060301 1-6-10 Input Tip • As its name suggests, a single-character variable is a variable name that consists of a single character like “ a ” or “ x ”. Each character you input on the V keyboard is treated as a single- character variable. To input multiple-character variable names like “ab” or multiple-character strings, you must us[...]

  • Seite 61

    20060301 • Tap I to return to the initial alphabet (abc) key set. u S key set Use this key set to input punctuation and symbols. Tap the J and K buttons to scroll to additional keys. 1-6-11 Input • Tap I to return to the initial alphabet (abc) key set. u n key set This key set contains some of the mathematical expression symbols that are also a[...]

  • Seite 62

    20060301 1-6-12 Input k Using Single-character V ariables As its name suggests, a single-character variable is a variable name that consists of a single character like “ a ” or “ x ”. Input of single-character variable names is subject to different rules than input of a series of multiple characters (like “abc”). u T o input a single-ch[...]

  • Seite 63

    20060301 u T o input a series of multiple c haracters A series of multiple characters (like “list1”) can be used for variable names, program commands, comment text, etc. Always use the alphabet (abc) keyboard when you want to input a series of characters. Example: 0abc w You can also use th e alphabet ( abc) keyboar d to input s ingle-charac te[...]

  • Seite 64

    20060301 u Catalog (cat) keyboard configuration 1-6-14 Input This is an alphabetized list of commands, functions, and other items available in the category currently selected with “Form”. Tap the down button and then select the category you want ([Func], [Cmd], [Sys], [User], or [All]) from the list that appears. Tapping a letter button displa[...]

  • Seite 65

    20060301 1-6-15 Input k Using the 2D Ke yboard The 2D keyboard provides you with a number of templates that let you input fractions, exponential values, n th roots, matrices, differentials, integrals, and other complex expressions as they appear in your textbook. It also includes a V key set that you can use to input single-character variables like[...]

  • Seite 66

    20060301 T o input this: Use these keys: For more information, see: Integration template P “ ∫ ” under “Using the Calculation Submenu” on page 2-8-14. u AD V key set Tapping the AD V key displays a keyboard like the one shown below, which has a I key in place of the AD V key. Tapping I returns to the initial 2D keyboard. The following are[...]

  • Seite 67

    20060301 u V key set Tapping the V key displays keys for inputting single-character variables, and changes the V softkey to I . You can tap this key to toggle between V and the initial 2D keyboard. Tapping the E key switches to a key set for inputting upper-case single-character variables. Tip • As its name suggests, a single-character variable i[...]

  • Seite 68

    20060301 1-6-18 Input Tip • If you want your ClassPad to evaluate a calculati on expression and disp lay a result in the e Activity application, you must input the calculation in a calculation row. See “Inserting a Calculation Row” on page 10-3-3. Example 2: To input (1) Tap ) to displa y the 2D key board and th en tap - . (2) Tap . (3) In th[...]

  • Seite 69

    20060301 1-6-19 Input (4) Tap with the stylus to move the cursor to the other input locations to enter the limits of integration. In the input box above ∫ , tap b . In the input box below ∫ , tap a . (5) After everything is the way you want, press E .[...]

  • Seite 70

    20060301 1-7-1 V ariables and F olders 1-7 V ariables and Folders Your ClassPad lets you register text strings as variables . You can then use a variable to store a value, expression, string, list, matrix, etc. A variable can be recalled by a calculation to access its contents. Variables are stored in folders. In addition to the default folders tha[...]

  • Seite 71

    20060301 k Current Folder The current folder is the folder where the variables created by applications (excluding eActivity) are stored and from which such variables can be accessed. The initial default current folder is the “main” folder. You can also select a user folder you created as the current folder. For more information about how to do [...]

  • Seite 72

    20060301 k V ariable Data T ypes ClassPad variables support a number of data types . The type of data assigned to a variable is indicated by a data type name . Data type names are shown on the Variable Manager variable list, and on the Select Data dialog box that appears when you are specifying a variable in any ClassPad application. The following [...]

  • Seite 73

    20060301 Creating a Folder You can have up to 87 user folders in memory at the same time. This section explains how to create a user folder and explains the rules that cover folder names. You can create a folder using either the Variable Manager or the “NewFolder” command. k Creating a folder using the V ariable Manager On the Variable Manager [...]

  • Seite 74

    20060301 (4) Tap w to execute the command. • The message “done” appears on the display to let you know that command execution is complete. 1-7-5 V ariables and F olders Tip • You can use the Variable Manager to view the contents of a folder you create. For more information, see “1-8 Using the Variable Manager”. • For information about[...]

  • Seite 75

    20060301 k Single-character V ariable Precautions Your ClassPad supports the use of single-character v ar iables , which are variables whose names consist of a single character like “ a ” or “ x ”. Some ClassPad keys ( x , y , Z keypad keys, math (mth) soft keyboard X , Y , Z , [ keys, V key set keys, etc.) are dedicated single-character va[...]

  • Seite 76

    20060301 1-7-7 V ariables and F olders Tip • As shown in the above example, assigning something to a variable with a name that does not yet exist in the current folder causes a new variable with that name to be created. If a variable with the specified name already exists in the current folder, the contents of the existing variable are replaced [...]

  • Seite 77

    20060301 1-7-8 V ariables and F olders k “library” Folder V ariables Variables in the “library” folder can be accessed without specifying a path name, regardless of the current folder. Example: To create and access two variables, one located in the “library” folder and one located in another folder u ClassPad Operation (1) With “main?[...]

  • Seite 78

    20060301 1-7-9 V ariables and F olders eq2 w Tip • Specifying a variable name that exists in both the current folder and the “library” folder causes the variable in the current folder to be accessed. For details about the variable access priority sequence and how to access variables in particular folders, see “Rules Governing Variable Acces[...]

  • Seite 79

    20060301 1-7-10 V ariables and F olders Assigning V alues and Other Data to a System V ariable As its name suggests, a system variable is a variable that is created and used by the system (page 1-7-5). Some system variables allow you to assign values and other data to them, while some system variables do not. For more information about which variab[...]

  • Seite 80

    20060301 1-7-11 V ariables and F olders Rules Governing V ariab le Access Normally, you access a variable by specifying its variable name. The rules in this section apply when you need to reference a variable that is not located in the current folder or to access a variable that has the same name as one or more variables located in other folders. k[...]

  • Seite 81

    20060301 1-8-1 Using the V ariable Manager 1-8 Using the V ariable Mana g er The Variable Manager is a tool for managing user variables, programs, user functions, and other types of data. Though this section uses only the term “variables”, the explanations provided here also refer to the other types of data that can be managed by the Variable M[...]

  • Seite 82

    20060301 • Tapping a folder name on the folder list selects it. Tapping the folder name again displays the folder’s contents; a variable list. Current folder Folder names Number of variables contained in the folder Folder List Number of variables contained in the folder Variable names Variable data types (page 1 -7-3) and sizes (bytes) Variable[...]

  • Seite 83

    20060301 V ariable Mana g er Folder Operations This section describes the various folder operations you can perform using the Variable Manager. k Specifying the Current Folder The “current folder” is the folder where the variables created by applications (excluding eActivity) are stored and from which such variables can be accessed. The initial[...]

  • Seite 84

    20060301 k Selecting and Deselecting Folders The folder operations you perform are performed on the currently selected folders. The folders that are currently selected on the fol der list are those whose check boxes are selected (checked). You can use the following operations to select and deselect folders as required. T o do this: Do this: Select [...]

  • Seite 85

    20060301 1-8-5 Using the V ariable Manager • You cannot delete the “library” folder or the “main” folder. • If no check box is currently selected on the folder list, the folder whose name is currently highlighted on the list is deleted when you tap [Edit] and then [Delete]. • An error message appears and the folder is not deleted if a[...]

  • Seite 86

    20060301 k Inputting a Folder Name into an Application Perform the procedure below when you want to input the name of a folder displayed on the Variable Manager window into the application from which you started up the Variable Manager. u ClassPad Operation (1) In the Main application, Graph & Table application, or some other application, move [...]

  • Seite 87

    20060301 V ariable Operations This section explains the various operations you can perform on the Variable Manager variables. k Opening a Folder Perform the steps below to open a folder and display the variables contained inside it. u ClassPad Operation (1) Start up the Variable Manager and display the folder list. (2) Tap the name of the folder yo[...]

  • Seite 88

    20060301 1-8-8 Using the V ariable Manager (3) On the dialog box, tap the down arrow button and then select the data type from the list that appears. • To display variables for all data types, select [All]. • For details about data type names and variables, see “Variable Data Types” on page 1-7-3. (4) After selecting the data type you want,[...]

  • Seite 89

    20060301 1-8-9 Using the V ariable Manager k Deleting a V ariable Perform the following steps when you want to delete a variable. u ClassPad Operation (1) Open the folder that contains the variable you want to delete and display the variable list. (2) Select the check box next to the variable you want to delete. • To delete multiple variables, se[...]

  • Seite 90

    20060301 Tip • If no check box is currently selected on the variable list, the variable whose name is currently highlighted on the list is copied or moved. • If a variable with the same name already exists in the destination folder, the variable in the destination folder is replaced with the one that you are copying or moving. • An error mess[...]

  • Seite 91

    20060301 1-8-11 Using the V ariable Manager u T o unlock a v ariable (1) Open the folder that contains the variable you want to unlock and display the variable list. (2) Select the check box next to the variable you want to unlock. (3) Tap [Edit] and then [Unlock]. k Searc hing for a V ariable You can use the following procedure to search the “ma[...]

  • Seite 92

    20060301 1-8-12 Using the V ariable Manager Example of EXPR variable contents k Viewing the Contents of a V ariable You can use the Variable Manager to view the contents of a particular variable. u ClassPad Operation (1) Open the folder that contains the variable whose contents you want to view and display on the variable list. (2) Tap the name of [...]

  • Seite 93

    20060301 1-8-13 Using the V ariable Manager k Inputting a V ariable Name into an Application Perform the procedure below when you want to input the name of a variable from the Variable Manager window into the application from which you started up the Variable Manager. u ClassP ad Operation (1) In the Main application, Graph & Table applicati[...]

  • Seite 94

    20060301 1-9 Configuring Application Format Settings The O menu includes format settings for configuring the number of calculation result display digits and the angle unit, as well as application-specific commands. The following describes each of the settings and commands that are available on the O menu. T o do this: Select this O menu command:[...]

  • Seite 95

    20060301 Specifying a V ariable Certain settings require that you specify variables. If you specify a user-stored variable when configuring the setting of such an item, you must specify the folder where the variable is stored and the variable name. Example: To use [Table Variable] on the [Special] tab of the Graph Format dialog box for configurin[...]

  • Seite 96

    20060301 (7) Tap [Set] to save your settings. Initializing All Application Format Settings Perform the following procedure when you want to return all application format settings to their initial defaults. u ClassP ad Operation (1) Tap O , or tap s on the icon panel, and then tap [Default Setup]. (2) In response to the “Reset Setup Data?” me[...]

  • Seite 97

    20060301 1-9-4 Configuring Application Format Settings Application Format Settings This section provides details about all of the settings you can configure using the application format settings. The following two points apply to all of the dialog boxes. • Some settings involve turning op tions on or off. Selecting a check box next to an option[...]

  • Seite 98

    20060301 1-9-5 Configuring Application Format Settings u Number Format T o specify this type of numeric v alue display format: Select this setting: Auto exponential display for values less than 10 –2 and from 10 10 or greater (when you are in the Decimal mode) Normal 1* Auto exponential display for values less than 10 –9 and from 10 10 or grea[...]

  • Seite 99

    20060301 k Graph Format Dialog Bo x Use the Graph Format dialog box to configure settings for the Graph window and for drawing graphs. 1-9-6 Configuring Application Format Settings Basic T ab u Axes T o do this: Select this setting: Turn on display of Graph window axes On* Turn on display of Graph window axes along with maximum and minimum value [...]

  • Seite 100

    20060301 T o do this: Do this: Turn on display of Graph window pointer coordinates Select the [Coordinates] check box.* Turn off display of Graph window pointer coordinates Clear the [Coordinates] check box. Turn on display of leading cursor during graphing Select the [Leading Cursor] check box. Turn off display of leading cursor during graphing Cl[...]

  • Seite 101

    20060301 1-9-8 Configuring Application Format Settings u Coordinates T o do this: Select this setting: Display coordinate values using rectangular coordinates Rectangular* Display coordinate values using polar coordinates Polar Turn off display of coordinates Off u Axes T o do this: Select this setting: Display axes normally On Display box type co[...]

  • Seite 102

    20060301 1-9-9 Configuring Application Format Settings • The above is the same as the [G-Controller] setting on the Graph Format dialog box. u G-Controller T o do this: Do this: Turn on display of graph controller arrows during graphing Select the [G-Controller] check box. Turn off display of graph controller arrows during graphing Clear the [G-[...]

  • Seite 103

    20060301 1-9-10 Configuring Application Format Settings u Function Angle T o specify the angle unit f or graphing: Select this setting: Radian Radian* Degree Degree Grad Grad u Axes T o set the initial Graph windo w axes condition when opening the Geometry application: Select this setting: Turn on display of Graph window axes On Turn on display of[...]

  • Seite 104

    20060301 1-9-11 Configuring Application Format Settings k Adv anced Format Dialog Box Use the Advanced Format dialog box to configure settings for Fourier transform and FFT settings. u FFT T o do this: Select this setting: Specify Pure Math for FFT scaling constant Pure Math Specify Signal Processing for FFT scaling constant Signal Processing* Sp[...]

  • Seite 105

    20060301 1-9-12 Configuring Application Format Settings k Financial Format Dialog Bo x Use the Financial Format dialog box to configure settings for the Financial application. Basic T ab u Days in Year T o do this: Select this setting: Specify a 360-day year 360 days* Specify a 365-day year 365 days u Payment Date T o do this: Select this setting[...]

  • Seite 106

    20060301 1-9-13 Configuring Application Format Settings Special T ab u Odd Period T o do this: Select this setting: Specify compound interest for odd (partial) months Compound (CI) Specify simple interest for odd (partial) months Simple (SI) Specify no separation of full and odd (partial) months Off* u Compounding Frequency T o do this: Select thi[...]

  • Seite 107

    20060301 1-9-14 Configuring Application Format Settings k Presentation Dialog Bo x Use the Presentation dialog box to configure settings for the Pres entati on app licati on. Fo r full detai ls abo ut the Pres entati on application, see Chapter 11. T o do this: Do this: Send hard copy data to an external device Sel ect “ Outer Devi ce” for [S[...]

  • Seite 108

    20060301 1-9-15 Configuring Application Format Settings k Communication Dialog Bo x Use the Communication dialog box to configure communication settings. For full detail s abou t the Communication application, see Chapter 17. u Speed (3Pin) T o specify this data rate for 3-pin comm unication: Select this setting: 9,600 bps 9600 bps 38,400 bps 384[...]

  • Seite 109

    20060301 2 Using the Main Application The Main application is a general-purpose numerical and m athematical calculation application that you can use to study mathematics and solve mathematical problems. You can use the Main application to perform general operations from basic arithmetic calculations, to calculations that involve lists, matrices, et[...]

  • Seite 110

    20060301 2-1-1 Main Application Overview 2-1 Main Application Over view This section provides information about the following. • Main application windows • Modes that determine how calculations and their results are displayed • Menus and their commands Starting Up the Main Application Use the following procedure to start up the Main applicati[...]

  • Seite 111

    20060301 • Basic Main application operations consist of inputting a calculation expression into the work area and pressing E . This performs th e calculation and then displays its result on the right side of the work area. Calculation result Input expression • Calculation results are displayed in natural format, with mathematical expressions ap[...]

  • Seite 112

    20060301 T o do this: Select this menu item: Undo the last operation or redo an operation that was just undone Edit - Undo/Redo Cut the selected character string and place it onto the clipboard Edit - Cut Copy the selected character string and place it onto the clipboard Edit - Copy Paste the contents of the clipboard at the current cursor position[...]

  • Seite 113

    20060301 Using Main Application Modes The Main application has a numbe r of different modes that control how calculation results ar e displayed, as well as other factors. The current mode is indicated in the status bar. k Status Bar Mode Indicators 2-1-4 Main Application Overview • You can tap a mode name in the status bar to change it, or use th[...]

  • Seite 114

    20060301 Accessing ClassP ad Application Windo ws from the Main Application Tapping the down arrow button on the toolbar displays a palette of 15 icons that you can use to access certain windows of other ClassPad applications. Tapping the ( button, for example, splits the display into two windows, with the Stat Editor window of the Statistics appli[...]

  • Seite 115

    20060301 • You can perform drag and drop operations with expressions between the Main application work area and the currently displayed window. For example, you could drag an expression from the Main application work area to the Graph window, and graph the expression. For details, see “2-10 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other A[...]

  • Seite 116

    20060301 2-2-1 Basic Calculations 2-2 Basic Calculations This section explains how to perform basic mathematical operations in the Main application. Arithmetic Calculations and P arentheses Calculations • You can perform arithmetic calculations by inputting expressions as they are written. All of the example calculations shown below are performed[...]

  • Seite 117

    20060301 2-2-2 Basic Calculations Using the e Ke y Use the e key to input exponential v alues. You can also input exponential values using the E key on the 9 and ) keyboards. Examples: 2.54 × 10 3 = 2540 c.fe e d w 1600 × 10 –4 = 0.16  bgaaE-e w Omitting the Multiplication Sign You can omit the multiplication sign in any of the following cas[...]

  • Seite 118

    20060301 2-2-3 Basic Calculations Tip • The “ans” variable is a system variable. For details about system variables, see “1-7 Variables and Folders”. • Since “ans” is a variable name, you can specify the “ans” variable by inputting [a][n][s] on the 0 (alphabet) keyboard, or by tapping the D key on the 9 or the ) keyboard. • Th[...]

  • Seite 119

    20060301 Calculation Error An error message dialog box, like the one shown below, appears when there is a problem with the syntax of an input expression or value, when the number of decimal places of a calculation result in the Stand ard mode (page 2-2-6 ) exceeds a specified range, etc. Tap [OK ] to close the dialog box and return to the calculat[...]

  • Seite 120

    20060301 Calculation Priority Sequence Your ClassPad automatically performs calculations in the following sequence. 1 Commands with parentheses (sin(, diff(, etc.) 2 Factorials ( x ! ), degree specifications ( o , r ), percents (%) 3 Powers 4 π , memory, and variable multiplication operations that omit the multiplication sign (2 π , 5A, etc.) Co[...]

  • Seite 121

    20060301 Calculation Modes The Main application has a number of different modes, as described under “Using Main Application Modes” on page 2-1-4. The display format of calculation results depends on the currently selected Main application mode. This section tells you which mode you need to use for each type of calculation, and explains the diff[...]

  • Seite 122

    20060301 u Using the u Button to T oggle between the Standard Mode and Decimal Mode You can tap u to toggle a displayed value between Standard mode and Decimal mode format. Note that tapping u toggles the format of a displayed value. It does not change the current Standard mode/Decimal mode setting. Example 1: Tapping u while the ClassPad is confi[...]

  • Seite 123

    20060301 2-2-8 Basic Calculations ( ) π 4 ( ) π 4 k Complex Mode and Real Mode The Complex mode is for complex number calculations, while the Real mode is limited to calculations within the range of real numbers. Performing a calculation in the Real mode that produces a result that is outside the range of real numbers causes an error (Non-Real in[...]

  • Seite 124

    20060301 2-3 Using the Calculation Histor y The Main application work area calculation history can contain up to 30 expression/result pairs. You can look up a previous calculation, edit, and then re-calculate it, if you want. Viewing Calculation History Contents Use the scroll bar or scroll buttons to scroll the work area window up and down. This b[...]

  • Seite 125

    20060301 Re-calculating an Expression You can edit a calculation expression in the calculation history and then re-calculate the resulting expression. Tapping w re-calculates the expression where the cursor is currently located, and also re-calculates all of the expressions below the current cursor location. Example 1: To change the expression “a[...]

  • Seite 126

    20060301 Example 2: To change from the Standard mode to the Decimal mode (page 2-2-6), and then re-calculate u ClassP ad Operation (1) Move the cursor to the location from which you want to re-calculate. • In this example, we will tap the end of line 2 to locate the cursor there. (2) Tap “Standard” on the status bar to toggle it to “Deci[...]

  • Seite 127

    20060301 Deleting P ar t of the Calculation History Contents You can use the following procedure to delete an individual two-line expression/result unit from the calculation history. u ClassP ad Operation (1) Move the cursor to the expression line or result line of the two-line unit you want to delete. (2) Tap [Edit] and then [Delete]. • This [...]

  • Seite 128

    20060301 2-4-1 Function Calculations 2-4 Function Calculations This section explains how to perform function calculations in the Main application work area. • Most of the operators and functi ons described in this section are input from the 9 (math) and ( (catalog) keyboard. The actual keyboard you should use to perform the sample operations pres[...]

  • Seite 129

    20060301 k T rigonometric Functions (sin, cos, tan) and In verse T rigonometric Functions (sin –1 , cos –1 , tan –1 ) The first four examples below use “Degree” (indicated by “Deg” in the status bar) as the angle unit setting. The final example uses “Radian” (indicated by “Rad”). For details about these settings, see “1-9 [...]

  • Seite 130

    20060301 k Logarithmic Functions (log, ln) and Exponential Functions ( e , ^, k ) Problem Use this keyboar d: Operation mth abc cat 2D log1.23 (log 10 1.23) = 0.08990511144  Func  l 1.23 w or )V 10 e 1.23 w ln90 (log e 90) = 4.49980967  Func  I 90 w or )V0 n e e 90 w log 3 9 = 2  Func  l 3 , 9 w or )V 3 e 9 w 10 1.23 = 16.98243652[...]

  • Seite 131

    20060301 k Hyperbolic Functions (sinh, cosh, tanh) and In ver se Hyperbolic Functions (sinh –1 , cosh –1 , tanh –1 ) Problem Use this keyboar d: Operation mth abc cat 2D sinh3.6 = 18.28545536 TRIG Func = 1 3.6 w cosh1.5 – sinh1.5 = 0.2231301601 TRIG Func = 2 1.5 )- 1 1.5 w e –1.5 = 0.2231301601*  MATH Func  e - 1.5 w cosh –1 ( 20 [...]

  • Seite 132

    20060301 k Other Functions (%, , x 2 , x –1 , x !, abs, signum, int, frac, intg, fRound, sRound) Problem Use this ke yboard: Operation mth abc cat 2D What is 12% of 1500? 180 SMBL Cmd 1500 * 12 & w What percent of 880 is 660? 75% SMBL Cmd 660 / 880 & w What value is 15% greater than 2500? 2875 SMBL Cmd 2500 *( 1 + 15 & What value is 2[...]

  • Seite 133

    20060301 Problem Use this ke yboard: Operation mth abc cat 2D What is the sign of –3.4567? –1 (signum returns –1 for a negative value, 1 for a positive value, “Undefined” for 0, and A  A  for an imaginary number.) Func [signum] - 3.4567 w What is the integer part of –3.4567? –3 CALC Func - 3.4567 w What is the decimal part of ?[...]

  • Seite 134

    20060301 u “rand” Function • The “rand” function generates random numbers. If you do not specify an argument, “rand” generates 10-digit decimal values 0 or greater and less than 1. Specifying two integer values for the argument generates random numbers between them. Problem Use this ke yboard: Operation mth abc cat 2D Generate random [...]

  • Seite 135

    20060301 2-4-8 Function Calculations u “RandSeed” Command • You can specify an integer from 0 to 9 for the argument of this command. 0 specifies non- sequential random number generation. An integer from 1 to 9 uses the specified value as a seed for specification of sequential random numbers. The initial default argument for this command is[...]

  • Seite 136

    20060301 k P ermutation ( n P r ) and Combination ( n C r ) u T otal Number of Permutations u T otal Number of Combinations Problem Use this ke yboard: Operation mth abc cat 2D How many different permutations are possible when you have 10 different objects and arrange them four at a time? 10 P 4 = 5040 CALC Func } 10 , 4 w How many different [...]

  • Seite 137

    20060301 The “piecewise” function returns one value when an expression is true, and another value when the expression is false. The syntax of the “piecewise” function is shown below. piecewise(<condition expression>, <return value when true>, <return value when false or indeterminate>[ ) ] or piecewise(<condition expres[...]

  • Seite 138

    20060301 k Equal Symbols and Unequal Symbols ( = , ≠ , < , > , , > ) You can use these symbols to perform a number of different basic calculations. Problem Use this ke yboard: Operation mth abc cat 2D To add 3 to both sides of x = 3. x + 3 = 6  MATH Cmd ( X = 3 )+ 3 w Subtract 2 from both sides of y < 5. y – 2 < 3 OPTN MATH Cm[...]

  • Seite 139

    20060301 2-4-12 Function Calculations k Sol utions Supp orted b y Cl assP ad (TRU E, F ALSE, U ndefin ed, No Solut ion, ∞ , const, constn) Solution Description Example TRUE Output when a solution is true. judge (1 = 1) w FALSE Output when a solution is false. judge (1 < 0) w Undefined Output when a solution is undefined. 1/0 w No Solution O[...]

  • Seite 140

    20060301 k Dirac Delta Function “delta” is the Dirac Delta function. The delta function evaluates numerically as shown below. Non-numeric expressions passed to the delta function are left unevaluated. The integral of a linear delta function is a Heaviside function. Syntax: delta( x ) x : variable or number Examples: 0, x ≠ 0 d ( x ) = { d ( x[...]

  • Seite 141

    20060301 2-4-14 Function Calculations k Heaviside Unit Step Function “heaviside” is the command for the Heaviside function, which evaluates only to numeric expressions as shown below. Any non-numeric expression passed to the Heaviside function will not be evaluated, and any numeric expression containing complex numbers will return undefined. T[...]

  • Seite 142

    20060301 2-4-15 Function Calculations k Gamma Function The Gamma function is called “gamma” on the ClassPad. For an integer n the gamma is evaluated as shown below. The gamma is defined for all real numbers excluding negative integers. It is also defined for all complex numbers where either the real or imaginary part of the complex number is [...]

  • Seite 143

    20060301 2-5-1 List Calculations 2-5 List Calculations This section explains how to input data using the Main application or Stat Editor, and how to perform basic list calculations. Inputting List Data You can input list data from the work area or on the Stat Editor window. k Inputting List Data from the W ork Area Example: To input the list {1, 2,[...]

  • Seite 144

    20060301 k LIST V ariable Element Operations You can recall the value of any element of a LIST variable. When the values {1, 2, 3} are assigned to “lista”, for example, you can recall the second value in the “lista”, when you need it. You can also assign a value to any element in a list. When the values {1, 2, 3} are assigned to “lista”[...]

  • Seite 145

    20060301 Using a List in a Calculation You can perform arithmetic operations between two lists, between a list and a numeric value, or between a list and an expression, equation, or inequality. 2-5-3 List Calculations k List Calculation Error s • When you perform an arithmetic operation between two lists, both of the lists need to have the same n[...]

  • Seite 146

    20060301 2-5-4 List Calculations Using a List to Assign Different V alues to Multiple V ariables Use the procedure in this section when you want to use a list to assign various different values to multiple variables. Syntax: List with Numbers S List with Variables Example: Assign the values 10, 20, and 30, to variables x , y , and z respectively u [...]

  • Seite 147

    20060301 2-6 Matrix and V ector Calculations This section explains how to create matrices in the Main application, and how to perform basic matrix calculations. Tip • Since a vector can be viewed as 1-row by n -column matrix or n -row by 1-column matrix, this section does not include explanations specifically about vectors. For more information [...]

  • Seite 148

    20060301 k Matrix V ariable Element Operations You can recall the value of any element of a MATRIX variable. When the data 1 2 3 4 is assigned to matrix “mat1”, for example, you can recall the element located at row 2, column 1. You can also assign a value to any element in a matrix. For example, you could assign the value “5” to the elemen[...]

  • Seite 149

    20060301 k Inputting Matrix V alues with the ) Keyboar d The 6 , 7 , and 8 keys of the ) keyboard make matrix value input quick and easy. T o do this: T ap this 2D key: Create a new 1-row × 2-column matrix 6 Create a new 2-row × 1-column matrix 7 Create a new 2-row × 2-column matrix 8 Add a column to the currently displayed matrix 6 Add a row to[...]

  • Seite 150

    20060301 Tip • In step (1) of the above procedure, we added rows and columns as they became necessary. Another way to accomplish the same result would be to add rows and columns to create a blank matrix of the required dimensions, and then start data input. You could create a 2-row × 3-column matrix by tapping 6 , 6 , 7 , or 6 , 8 . In either ca[...]

  • Seite 151

    20060301 (3) Tap 8 , and then input the values for the second matrix. 2-6-5 Matrix and V ector Calculations Example 3: To multiply the matrix 1 2 3 4 by 5 u ClassPad Operation (1) Perform the key operation below in the Main application work area. 9 [[b,c][d,e]]*f (2) Tap w . (4) Tap w . Tip • Note that when adding or subtracting two matrices, the[...]

  • Seite 152

    20060301 2-6-6 Matrix and V ector Calculations k Raising a Matrix to a Specific P ower Example: To raise 1 2 3 4 to the power of 3 Use the procedures described under “Matrix Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Division” on page 2-6-4 to input the calculation. The following are the screens that would be produced by each input method. Tip[...]

  • Seite 153

    20060301 2-7 Specifying a Number Base While using the Main application, you can specify a default number base (binary, octal, decimal, hexadecimal) or you can specify a number base for a particular integer value. You can also convert between number bases and perform bitwise operations using logical operators (not, and, or, xor). Note that while a d[...]

  • Seite 154

    20060301 • The following are the calculation ranges for each of the number bases. Binary Values: Positive: 0 x 01111111111111111111111111111111 Negative: 10000000000000000000000000000000 x 11111111111111111111111111111111 Octal Values: Positive: 0 x 17777777777 Negative: 20000000000 x 37777777777 Decimal Values: Positive: 0 x 2147483647 Negative:[...]

  • Seite 155

    20060301 Selecting a Number Base Specifying a default number base in the Main application will apply to the current line (expression/result pair), and to all subsequent lines until you change the default number ba se setting. Use the number toolbar’s base buttons to specify the number base. u T o select the number base f or the line where the cur[...]

  • Seite 156

    20060301 • Whenever you input a val ue into a line for which a number base is specified, the inpu t value is converted automatically to the specified number base. Performing the calculation 19+1 in a line for which Hex (Hexadecimal) is specified as the number base, both the 19 and 1 are interpreted as hexadecimal values, which produces the cal[...]

  • Seite 157

    20060301 Bitwise Operations The logical operators listed below can be used in calculations. Operator Description and Returns the result of a bitwise product. or Returns the result of a bitwise sum. xor Returns the result of a bitwise exclusive logical sum. not Returns the result of a complement (bitwise inversion). Examples 1, 2, and 3 use Bin (bin[...]

  • Seite 158

    20060301 2-8-1 Using the Action Menu 2-8 Using the Action Menu The [Action] menu helps to make transformation and expansion functions, calculus functions, statistical functions, and other frequently used mathematical menu operations easier to use. Simply select the function you want, and then enter expressions or variables in accordance with the sy[...]

  • Seite 159

    20060301 2-8-2 Using the Action Menu Example Screenshots The screenshots below show examples of how input and output expressions appear on the ClassPad display. In some cases, the input expression and output expression (result) may not fit in the display area. If this happens, tap the left or right arrows that appear on the display to scroll the e[...]

  • Seite 160

    20060301 20080201 Displaying the Action Men u Tap [Action] on the menu bar to display the menu of 12 submenus shown below. 2-8-3 Using the Action Menu The following explains the functions that are available on each of these submenus. Using the T ransformation Submenu The [Transformation] submenu contains commands for expression transformation, like[...]

  • Seite 161

    20060301 u simplify Function: Simplifies an expression. Syntax: simplify (Exp/Eq/Ineq/List/Mat [ ) ] • Ineq (inequality) includes the “ ≠ ” (not equal to) relational operator. Example: To simplify (15 3 + 26)^(1/3) Menu Item: [Action][Transformation][simplify] Example: To simplify cos(2 x ) + (sin( x )) 2 (in the Radian mode) Menu Item: [A[...]

  • Seite 162

    20060301 2-8-5 Using the Action Menu u rFactor Function: Factors an expression up to its roots, if any. Syntax: rFactor (Exp/Eq/Ineq/List/Mat [ ) ] • Ineq (inequality) includes the “ ≠ ” (not equal to) relational operator. Example: To factor x 2  3 Menu Item: [Action][Transformation][rFactor] u factorOut Function: Factors out an expressi[...]

  • Seite 163

    20060301 2-8-6 Using the Action Menu u tExpand Function: Employs the sum and difference formulas to expand a trigonometric function. Syntax: tExpand(Exp/Eq/Ineq/List/Mat [ ) ] • Ineq (inequality) includes the “ ≠ ” (not equal to) relational operator. Example: To expand sin (a + b) Menu Item: [Action][Transformation][tExpand] u tCollect Func[...]

  • Seite 164

    20060301 2-8-7 Using the Action Menu u propFrac Function: Transforms a decimal value into its equivalent proper fraction value. Syntax: propFrac (Exp/Eq/Ineq/List/Mat [ ) ] • Ineq (inequality) includes the “ ≠ ” (not equal to) relational operator. Example: To transform 1.2 into its equivalent proper fraction value Menu Item: [Action][Transf[...]

  • Seite 165

    20060301 20080201 Using the Adv anced Submenu u solve For information about solve, see page 2-8-43. u dSolve For information about dSolve, see page 2-8-44. u taylor Function: Finds a Taylor polynomial for an expression with respect to a specifi c variable. Syntax: taylor (Exp/List, variable, order [,center point] [ ) ] Example: To fi nd a 5th ord[...]

  • Seite 166

    20060301 ClassPad supports transform of the following functions. sin( x ), cos( x ), sinh( x ), cosh( x ), x n , x , e x , heaviside( x ), delta( x ), delta( x , n ) ClassPad does not support transform of the following functions. tan( x ), sin – 1 ( x ), cos – 1 ( x ), tan – 1 ( x ), tanh( x ), sinh – 1 ( x ), cosh – 1 ( x ), tanh – 1 ([...]

  • Seite 167

    20060301 The values of a and b depend on the scientific discipline, which can be specified by the value of n (optional fourth parameter of Fourier and invFourier) as shown below. n (optional) a b Definition of the Fou rier Integral Modern Physics 0 0 1 ∫ ∞ – ∞ e ω • x • i • f ( x ) dx 2 • 2 • π Pure Math 1 1 –1 Probability [...]

  • Seite 168

    20060301 2-8-11 Using the Action Menu u FFT , IFFT Function: “ FFT ” is the command for the fast Fourier Transform, and “ IFFT ” is the command for the inverse fast Fourier Transform. 2 n data values are needed to perform FFT and IFFT. On the ClassPad, FFT and IFFT are calculated numerically. Syntax: FFT( list ) or FFT( list, m ) IFFT( list[...]

  • Seite 169

    20060301 20080201 2-8-12 Using the Action Menu Using the Calculation Submenu The [Calculation] submenu contains calculus related commands, such as “diff” (differentiation) and “ ∫ ” (integration). Unfortunately, a number of conventions are in widespread use for a and b . For example, (0, 1) is used in modern physics, (1, –1) is used in [...]

  • Seite 170

    20060301 2-8-13 Using the Action Menu u impDiff Function: Differentiates an equation or expression in implicit form with respect to a specific variable. Syntax: impDiff(Eq/Exp/List, independent variable, dependent variable) Example: To find y ’ using implicit differentiation Menu Item: [Action][Calculation][impDiff] Example: To find y ’ for [...]

  • Seite 171

    20060301 2-8-14 Using the Action Menu u ∫ Function: Integrates an expression with respect to a specific variable. Syntax: ∫ (Exp/List[,variable] [ ) ] ∫ (Exp/List, variable, lower limit, upper limit [, tol ] [ ) ] • “ x ” is the default when you omit [,variable]. • “ tol ” represents the allowable error range. • This command re[...]

  • Seite 172

    20060301 2-8-15 Using the Action Menu u Σ Function: Evaluates an expression at discrete variable values within a range, and then calculates a sum. Syntax: Σ (Exp/List, variable, lower value, upper value [ ) ] Example: To calculate the sum of x 2 as the value of x changes from x = 1 through x =10. Menu Item: [Action][Calculation][ Σ ] u Π Functi[...]

  • Seite 173

    20060301 2-8-16 Using the Action Menu u normal Function: Returns the right side of the equation for the line normal ( y = ‘expression’) to the curve at the specified point. Syntax: normal (Exp/List, variable, variable value at point of normal [ ) ] Example: To determine the function of the line normal to y = x 3 at x = 2 Menu Item: [Action][Ca[...]

  • Seite 174

    20060301 2-8-17 Using the Action Menu Example: To find the minimum point of x 2 – 1 with respect to x , when 2 < x < 3 Menu Item: [Action][Calculation][fMin] Example: To find the minimum point of x 3 – 6 x with respect to x , when –2 < x < 2 and n = 1 Menu Item: [Action][Calculation][fMin] u fMin Function: Returns the minimum po[...]

  • Seite 175

    20060301 2-8-18 Using the Action Menu u gcd Function: Returns the greatest common denominator of two expressions. Syntax: gcd (Exp/List-1, Exp/List-2 [ ) ] Example: To obtain the greatest common denominator of x + 1 and x 2 – 3 x – 4 Menu Item: [Action][Calculation][gcd] u fMax Function: Returns the maximum point in a specific range of a funct[...]

  • Seite 176

    20060301 20080201 2-8-19 Using the Action Menu u arg Function: Returns the argument of a complex number. Syntax: arg (Exp/Eq/List/Mat [ ) ] Example: To obtain the argument of complex 2 + i (in the Radian mode) Menu Item: [Action][Complex][arg] u lcm Function: Returns the least common multiple of two expressions. Syntax: lcm (Exp/List-1, Exp/List-2 [...]

  • Seite 177

    20060301 2-8-20 Using the Action Menu u conjg Function: Returns the conjugate complex number. Syntax: conjg (Exp/Eq/List/Mat [ ) ] • An inequality with the “ ≠ ” (not equal to) relation symbol is also included (only in the Real mode). Example: To obtain the conjugate of complex number 1 + i Menu Item: [Action][Complex][conjg] u re Function:[...]

  • Seite 178

    20060301 20080201 2-8-21 Using the Action Menu u compT oPol Function: Transforms a complex number into its polar form. Syntax: compToPol (Exp/Eq/List/Mat [ ) ] • Ineq (inequality) includes the “ ⫽ ” (not equal to) relational operator. Example: To transform 1 + i into its polar form (in the Radian mode) Menu Item: [Action][Complex][compToPol[...]

  • Seite 179

    20060301 2-8-22 Using the Action Menu u seq Function: Generates a list in accordance with a numeric sequence expression. Syntax: seq (Exp, variable, start value, end value [,step size] [ ) ] Example: To generate a list in accordance with the expression x 2 + 2 x when the start value is 1, the end value is 5, and the step size is 2 Menu Item: [Actio[...]

  • Seite 180

    20060301 u subList Function: Extracts a specific section of a list into a new list. Syntax: subList (List [,start number] [,end number] [ ) ] Example: To extract the second through the fourth elements of the list {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} Menu Item: [Action][List-Create][subList] • The leftmost element is the default when you omit “[,start number]”, a[...]

  • Seite 181

    20060301 20080201 2-8-24 Using the Action Menu u sortD Function: Sorts the elements of the list into descending order. Syntax: sortD (List [ ) ] Example: To sort the elements of the list {1, 5, 3} into descending order Menu Item: [Action][List-Create][sortD] u listT oMat Function: Transforms lists into a matrix. Syntax: listToMat (List-1 [, List-2,[...]

  • Seite 182

    20060301 u min Function: Returns the minimum value of an expression or the elements in a list. Syntax: min (Exp/List-1[, Exp/List-2] [ ) ] Example: To determine the minimum values of the elements in list {1, 2, 3} Menu Item: [Action][List-Calculation][min] Example: To compare each element of list {1, 2, 3} with the value 2, and produce a list whose[...]

  • Seite 183

    20060301 Example: To determine the mean of the elements in the list {1, 2, 3}, whose respective frequencies are {3, 2, 1} Menu Item: [Action][List-Calculation][mean] u median Function: Returns the median of the elements in a list. Syntax: median (List-1[, List-2] [ ) ] • “List-2” specifies the frequency of each element in “List-1”. Examp[...]

  • Seite 184

    20060301 u Q 1 Function: Returns the first quartile of the elements in a list. Syntax: Q 1 (List-1[, List-2] [ ) ] • “List-2” specifies the frequency of each element in “List-1”. Example: To determine the first quartile of the elements in the list {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} Menu Item: [Action][List-Calculation][Q 1 ] Example: To determine the fi[...]

  • Seite 185

    20060301 u variance Function: Returns the sample variance of the elements in a list. Syntax: variance (List [ ) ] Example: To determine the sample variance of the elements in the list {1, 2, 4} Menu Item: [Action][List-Calculation][variance] u dim Function: Returns the dimension of a list. Syntax: dim (List [ ) ] Example: To determine the dimension[...]

  • Seite 186

    20060301 2-8-29 Using the Action Menu u cuml Function: Returns the cumulative sums of the elements in a list. Syntax: cuml (List [ ) ] Example: To determine the cumulative sums of the elements in the list {1, 2, 3} Menu Item: [Action][List-Calculation][cuml] u A list Function: Returns a list whose elements are the differences between two adjacent e[...]

  • Seite 187

    20060301 2-8-30 Using the Action Menu u sequence Function: Returns the lowest-degree polynomial that represents the sequence expressed by the input list. When there are two lists, this command returns a polynomial that maps each element in the first list to its corresponding element in the second list. Syntax: sequence (List-1[, List-2] [,variable[...]

  • Seite 188

    20060301 20080201 2-8-31 Using the Action Menu Using the Matrix-Create Submenu The [Matrix-Create] submenu contains commands related to creation of matrices. u trn Function: Returns a transposed matrix. Syntax: trn (Mat [ ) ] Example: To transpose the matrix [[1, 2] [3, 4]] Menu Item: [Action][Matrix-Create][trn] u augment Function: Returns a matri[...]

  • Seite 189

    20060301 2-8-32 Using the Action Menu u fill Function: Creates a matrix with a specific number of rows and columns, or replaces the elements of a matrix with a specific expression. Syntax: fill (Exp, number of rows, number of columns [ ) ] fill (Exp, Mat [ ) ] Example: To create a 2 × 3 matrix, all whose elements are 2 Menu Item: [Action][Mat[...]

  • Seite 190

    20060301 20080201 u matT oList Function: Transforms a specifi c column of a matrix into a list. Syntax: matToList (Mat, column number [ ) ] Example: To transform column 2 of the matrix [[1, 2] [3, 4]] into a list Menu Item: [Action][Matrix-Create][matToList] Using the Matrix-Calculation Submenu The [Matrix-Calculation] submenu contains commands th[...]

  • Seite 191

    20060301 u norm Function: Returns the Frobenius norm of the matrix. Syntax: norm (Mat [ ) ] Example: To determine the norm of the matrix [[1, 2] [4, 5]] Menu Item: [Action][Matrix-Calculation][norm] u rank Function: Finds the rank of matrix. The rank function computes the rank of a matrix by performing Gaussian elimination on the rows of the given [...]

  • Seite 192

    20060301 2-8-35 Using the Action Menu u eigVc Function: Returns a matrix in which each column represents an eigenvector of a square matrix. • Since an eigenvector usually cannot be determined uniquely, it is standardized as follows to its norm, which is 1: When V = [ x 1, x 2, ..., xn ], (  x 1  2 +  x 2  2 + .... +  xn  2 ) = 1[...]

  • Seite 193

    20060301 2-8-36 Using the Action Menu u QR Function: Returns the QR decomposition of a square matrix. Syntax: QR (Mat, qVariableMem, rVariableMem [ ) ] Example: To obtain the QR decomposition of the matrix [[1, 2] [3, 4]] • The unitary matrix is assigned to variable Q, while the upper triangular matrix is assigned to variable R. Menu Item: [Actio[...]

  • Seite 194

    20060301 u mRowAdd Function: Multiplies the elements of a specific row in a matrix by a specific expression, and then adds the result to another row. Syntax: mRowAdd (Exp, Mat, row number-1, row number-2 [ ) ] Example: T o m ult ipl y r ow 1 o f t he mat rix [[ 1, 2] [3, 4] ] b y x , a nd the n a dd the re sul t t o r ow 2 Menu Item: [Action][Mat[...]

  • Seite 195

    20060301 20080201 2-8-38 Using the Action Menu u colNorm Function: Calculates the sums of the absolute values of the elements of each column of a matrix, and returns the maximum value of the sums. Syntax: colNorm (Mat [ ) ] Example: To calculate the sums of the absolute values of the elements in each column of the matrix [[1, –2, 3][4, –5, –6[...]

  • Seite 196

    20060301 u augment Function: Returns an augmented vector [Mat-1 Mat-2]. Syntax: augment (Mat-1, Mat-2 [ ) ] Example: To augment vectors [1, 2] and [3, 4] Menu Item: [Action][Vector][augment] u fill Function: Creates a vector that contains a specific number of elements, or replaces the elements of a vector with a specific expression. Syntax: fil[...]

  • Seite 197

    20060301 u angle Function: Returns the angle formed by two vectors. Syntax: angle (Mat-1, Mat-2 [ ) ] • This command can be used with a 1 × N or N × 1 matrix only. Example: To determine the angle formed by vectors [1, 2] and [3, 4] (in the Radian mode) Menu Item: [Action][Vector][angle] u norm Function: Returns the norm of a vector. Syntax: nor[...]

  • Seite 198

    20060301 u toRect Function: Returns an equivalent rectangular form [ x y ] or [ x y z ]. Syntax: toRect (Mat [,natural number] [ ) ] • This command can be used with a 1 × N or N × 1 matrix only (N = 2, 3). • This command returns “ x ” when “natural number” is 1, “ y ” when “natural number” is 2, and “ z ” when “natural n[...]

  • Seite 199

    20060301 20080201 u toCyl Function: Returns an equivalent cylindrical form [ r ∠ θ z ]. Syntax: toCyl (Mat [,natural number] [ ) ] • This command can be used with a 1 × 3 or 3 × 1 matrix only. • This command returns “ r ” when “natural number” is 1, “ θ ” when “natural number” is 2, and “ z ” when “natural number” [...]

  • Seite 200

    20060301 20080201 2-8-43 Using the Action Menu u solve Function: Returns the solution of an equation or inequality. Syntax: solve (Exp/Eq/Ineq [,variable] [ ) ] • For this syntax, “Ineq” also includes the ⫽ operator. • “ x ” is the default when you omit “[,variable]”. solve (Exp/Eq,variable[, value, lower limit, upper limit] [ ) ][...]

  • Seite 201

    20060301 2-8-44 Using the Action Menu u dSolve Function: Solves first, second or third order ordinary differential equations, or a system of first order differential equations. Syntax: dSolve (Eq, independent variable, dependent variable [, initial condition-1, initial condition-2][, initial condition-3, initial condition-4][, initial condition-5[...]

  • Seite 202

    20060301 2-8-45 Using the Action Menu u eliminate Function: Solves one equation with respect to a variable, and then replaces the same variable in another expression with the obtained result. Syntax: eliminate (Eq/Ineq/List-1, variable, Eq-2 [ ) ] • Ineq (inequality) includes the “ ≠ ” (not equal to) relational operator. Example: To transfo[...]

  • Seite 203

    20060301 2-8-46 Using the Action Menu u and Function: Returns the result of the logical AND of two expressions. Syntax: Exp/Eq/Ineq/List-1 and Exp/Eq/Ineq/List-2 • Ineq (inequality) includes the “ ≠ ” (not equal to) relational operator. Example: To obtain the result of the logical AND of x 2 > 1 and x < 0 Menu Item: [Action][Equation/[...]

  • Seite 204

    20060301 20080201 2-8-47 Using the Action Menu Using the Assistant Submenu The [Assistant] submenu contains two commands related to the Assistant mode. • Note that the following commands are valid in the Assistant mode only. For more information on the Assistant mode see “Assistant Mode and Algebra Mode” on page 2-2-8. u arrange Function: Col[...]

  • Seite 205

    20080201 2-8-48 Using the Action Menu u Clear_a_z Function: Clears all single-character variable names (a-z and A-Z) in the current folder. Using the Distribution Submen u The [Distribution] submenu includes functions related to each type of statistical calculation distribution probability. Note The functions on the [Distribution] submenu perform t[...]

  • Seite 206

    20080201 u normCDf Function: Returns the cumulative probability of a normal distribution between a lower bound and an upper bound. Syntax: normCDf (lower value, upper value[, σ , μ )] • When σ and μ are skipped, σ = 1 and μ = 0 are used. Example: To determine the normal probability density when lower bound value = − ∞ , upper bound valu[...]

  • Seite 207

    20080201 u tCDf Function: Returns the cumulative probability of a Student- t distribution between a lower bound and an upper bound. Syntax: tCDf (lower value, upper value, df [ ) ] Example: To determine the Student- t distribution probability when lower value = 1.5, upper value = ∞ , df = 18 Menu Item: [Action][Distribution][tCDf] For more inform[...]

  • Seite 208

    20080201 Menu Item: [Action][Distribution][invChiCDf] For more information, see “Inverse χ 2 Cumulative Distribution” on page 7-11-10. u fPDf Function: Returns the F probability density for a specified value. Syntax: fPDf ( x , n : df , d : df [ ) ] Example: To determine the F probability density when x = 1.5, n : df = 24, d : df = 19 Menu Ite[...]

  • Seite 209

    20080201 2-8-52 Using the Action Menu u binomialCDf Function: Returns the cumulative probability in a binomial distribution that the success will occur on or before a specified trial. Syntax: binomialCDf ( x , numtrial value, pos [ ) ] Example: To determine the binomial cumulative probability when x = 5, numtrial value = 3, pos = 0.63 Menu Item: [A[...]

  • Seite 210

    20080201 u poissonPDf Function: Returns the probability in a Poisson distribution that the success will occur on a specified trial. Syntax: poissonPDf ( x , μ [ ) ] Example: To determine the Poisson probability when x = 10, μ = 6 Menu Item: [Action][Distribution][poissonPDf] For more information, see “Poisson Distribution Probability” on page[...]

  • Seite 211

    20080201 Example: To determine the minimum number of trials when pr ob = 0.8074, μ = 2.26 Menu Item: [Action][Distribution][invPoissonCDf] For more information, see “Inverse Poisson Cumulative Distribution” on page 7-11-19. u geoPDf Function: Returns the probability in a geometric distribution that the success will occur on a specified trial. [...]

  • Seite 212

    20080201 The calculation results of invGeoCDf are integers. Accuracy may be reduced when the first argument has 10 or more digits. Note that even a slight difference in calculation accuracy affects calculation results. If a warning message appears, check the displayed values. Example: To determine the minimum number of trials when pr ob = 0.875, po[...]

  • Seite 213

    20060301 (3) Tap [Interactive], [Transformation], and then [factor]. • This factorizes the selected expression. 2-9 Using the Interactive Menu The [Interactive] menu includes most of the commands that are on the [Action] menu. Selecting a command on the [Action] menu will simply execute the command. With the [Interactive] menu, on the other hand,[...]

  • Seite 214

    20060301 2-9-2 Using the Interactiv e Menu u T o factorize from the Action menu (1) Tap [Action], [Transformation], and then [factor]. • This inputs “factor(” into the work area. (2) Input the expression you want to factorize ( x 3 – 3 x 2 + 3 x – 1). (3) Tap w . • This factorizes the selected expression. [Interactive] menu operations c[...]

  • Seite 215

    20060301 (4) On the dialog box, tap “Definite integral” to select it. • This displays boxes for specifying the variable and the lower limit and the upper limit. 2-9-3 Using the Interactiv e Menu (5) Input the required data for each of the following three arguments. Variable: x Lower: 1 Upper: 2 (6) Tap [OK]. • This performs the calculation[...]

  • Seite 216

    20060301 2-9-4 Using the Interactiv e Menu (3) Tap [Interactive] and then [apply]. • This executes the part of the calculation you selected in step (2). The part of the calculation that is not selected ( × cos( x ) + sin( x ) × diff(cos( x ), x )) is output to the display as-is. Using the “apply” Command The “apply” command is included [...]

  • Seite 217

    20060301 2-10-1 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications Graph 3D Graph Conics Graph Geometry Stat Editor Financial Numeric Solver Verify Graph Editor 3D Graph Editor Conics Editor Spreadsheet Differential Equation Editor Probability Sequence Editor (2) Tap the button that corresponds to the window you want to display. • [...]

  • Seite 218

    20060301 2-10-2 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications Closing Another Application’ s Window u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap anywhere inside of the window you would like to close. (2) Tap the S button in the upper right corner, or tap O and then [Close]. • The Main application work area expands to fill the entire displa[...]

  • Seite 219

    20060301 2-10-3 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications (3) Drag the stylus across “ x ^2 – 1” in the work area to select it. (4) Drag the selected expression to the Graph window. • This graphs y = x 2 – 1. This graph reveals that the x -intercepts are x = ± 1. Tip • As can be seen in the above example, a grap[...]

  • Seite 220

    20060301 2-10-4 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications Using a Graph Editor Window (Graph & T able: ! , Conics: * , 3D Graph: @ , Numeric Solver: 1 ) You can copy expressions by dragging them between the work area window and the Graph Editor, Conics Editor, 3D Graph Editor, and Numeric Solver windows. Example: To copy[...]

  • Seite 221

    20060301 2-10-5 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications (4) Press E to register the expression. • The copied expression is displayed in natural format, with the check box next to it selected. • You could now tap $ to graph the function. Tip • For more information about the Graph Editor window, see Chapter 3. For more[...]

  • Seite 222

    20060301 2-10-6 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications u ClassPad Operation (1) On the work area window, tap ( to display the Stat Editor window in the lower window. (2) Input the following list data into the lists named “list1” and “list2”. list1 = {1, 2, 3} list2 = {4, 5, 6} (3) Make the work area window active,[...]

  • Seite 223

    20060301 2-10-7 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications (4) Tap the Stat Editor window to make it active. • Here you can see that list3 contains the result of list1 + list2. (5) Tap the work area window to make it active. (6) Perform the operation {12, 24, 36} ⇒ test, which assigns the list data {12, 24, 36} to the LIS[...]

  • Seite 224

    20060301 (7) Tap the Stat Editor window to make it active. (8) Scroll the screen to the right until the blank list to the right of “list6” is visible. 2-10-8 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications (9) Tap the blank cell next to “list6”, input “test”, and then tap w . • This displays the list data {12, 24, 36[...]

  • Seite 225

    20060301 2-10-9 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications Using the Geometry Windo w 3 When there is a Geometry window on the display, you can drag values and expressions to the Geometry window to draw the graph or figure of the value or expression. You can also drag a figure from the Geometry window to the work area, whic[...]

  • Seite 226

    20060301 2-10-10 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications (5) Drag the stylus across x 2 + y 2 = 1 in the work area to select it. (6) Drag the selected expression to the Geometry window. • A circle appears in the Geometry window. Tip • The following table shows the types of expressions you can drop into the Geometry win[...]

  • Seite 227

    20060301 2-10-11 Using the Main Application in Combination with Other Applications k Dragging a Figure fr om the Geometry Window to the W ork Area The following shows what happens when you drag a figure from the Geometry window to the work area. Dropping this into the w ork area: Displays this: Point Line Circle, Arc, Ellipse, Function, or Curve L[...]

  • Seite 228

    20060301 2-11-1 Using V erify 2-11 Using V erify Verify provides you with a powerful tool to check whether your numeric or algebraic manipulations are correct. Verify will assist you in simplifying an expression by verifying whether or not the expression you entered is equivalent to your original expression. If it is, you will get a pleasant respon[...]

  • Seite 229

    20060301 V erify Menus and Buttons This section provides basic information about Verify menus, commands, and buttons. Tip • O menu items are the same for all applications. For more information, see “Using the O Menu” on page 1-5-4. k File Menu T o do this: Select this File menu item: Discard the current window contents and create a new file [...]

  • Seite 230

    20060301 2-11-3 Using V erify k V erify Buttons T o do this: T ap this Verify b utton: Clea r the Verify windo w (sam e as t he Cle ar All comma nd) E Open or save a file (Main application only) R Specify the complex number calculation range for Verify T Specify the real number calculation range for Verify Y Specify the positive real number calcul[...]

  • Seite 231

    20060301 2-11-4 Using V erify (4) Following the equal sign (=), input 25 × 3 and tap w . (5) Tap [OK] to close the error dialog that appears. (6) Change 25 × 3 to 25 × 2 and tap w . (7) Following the next equal sign (=), input 5 × 5 × 2 and tap w . Example 2: To rewrite x 2 + 1 in factored form (1) Tap the left most toolbar icon E to begin a n[...]

  • Seite 232

    20060301 2-12 Using Pr obability You can use Probability to simulate the following. • The die faces that will appear when a single die is thrown a specified number of times (1 Die) • The sum of the data of dice faces that will appear when a pair of dice is shown a specified number of times (2 Dice +) • The product of the data of dice faces [...]

  • Seite 233

    20060301 Starting Up Probability Use the following procedure to start up Probability. u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap the right most toolbar down arrow button. (2) On the icon palette that appears, tap P . • This will display an initial Probability dialog box like the one shown below. You can use this dialog box to try the probability emulation. (3)[...]

  • Seite 234

    20060301 k Edit Menu T o do this: Select this Edit menu item: Copy the currently selected object (trial information or trial result) and place it onto the clipboard Copy Disp lay the Probab ility dialog box and try t he prob ability emulat ion (t he trial result will be added to the end of the current file) Add Delete the currently selected trial [...]

  • Seite 235

    20060301 Using Probability The following examples show the basic steps for using Probability. Example 1: To obtain the sum data when a two six-sided die are thrown 50 times u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap the right most toolbar down arrow button. (2) On the icon palette that appears, tap P . • This displays the Probability dialog box. (3) Tap the bu[...]

  • Seite 236

    20060301 Example 2: To obtain the product data when a two six-sided die are thrown 150 times (This example assumes you are continuing from Example 1.) (1) Tap P to display the Probability dialog box. (2) Tap the button next to “2 Dice ` ” to select it. (3) Enter 150 into the “Number of trials” box. • Leave the value in the “Number of fa[...]

  • Seite 237

    20060301 (3) Configure the following settings on the dialog box. • Replace: Yes (Indicates the ball is replaced before the next draw. If the ball is not replaced, select “No”.) • A: 10, B: 20, C: 30 (Leaver other letters set to zero.) • Number of trials: 50 (4) Tap [OK]. • The result will appear in the Probability window. 2-12-6 Using [...]

  • Seite 238

    20060301 Main application Program Program eActivity application 2-13 Running a Pr ogram in the Main Application You can run a program in the Main application or the eActivity application. Syntax: Folder nameProgram name(parameter) • You do not need to specify the folder name if the program you want to run is in the current folder. If you leave C[...]

  • Seite 239

    20060301 (3) Enter 20 and then tap [OK]. • This will run OCTA and display the results in the program output window. (4) To close the program output window, tap anywhere inside it and then tap the S button in upper right corner. Program output window 2-13-2 Running a Program in the Main Application Example: To run the program named OCTA that we cr[...]

  • Seite 240

    20060301 Using the Graph & T able Application The Graph & Table application allows you to input and graph rectangular coordinate equations (or inequalities), polar coordinate equations, and parametric expressions. After you graph an expression, you can zoom in or out, and move a pointer along the graph, displaying its coordinates as you go.[...]

  • Seite 241

    20060301 3-1 Graph & T able Application Overvie w This section describes the configuration of the Graph & Table application windows and provides basic information about its menus and commands. Starting Up the Graph & T ab le Application Use the following procedure to start up the Graph & Table application. u ClassPad Operation On t[...]

  • Seite 242

    20060301 You can also use a function on the Graph Editor window to generate a number table or a summary table. Number tables and summary tables are displayed in a Table window. Graph & T able Application Menus and Buttons This section explains the operations you can perform using the Graph & Table application menus and buttons. • For info[...]

  • Seite 243

    20060301 T o do this: T ap this button: Or select this menu item: Input a rectangular coordinate type inequality j Type - y > Type l Type - y < Type ' Type - y t Type X Type - y s Type Input an X inequality k Type - x > Type ; Type - x < Type Z Type - x t Type C Type - x s Type Input two functions in a list and shade between them T[...]

  • Seite 244

    20060301  k Graph Window Menus and Buttons T o do this: T ap this button: Or select this menu item: Cut the character string selected in the message box and place it onto the clipboard — Edit - Cut Copy the character string selected in the message box to the clipboard — Edit - Copy Paste the contents of the clipboard at the current cursor[...]

  • Seite 245

    20060301 T o do this: T ap this button: Or select this menu item: Display the coordinates at a particular point on a graph = Analysis - Trace Insert a point, graphic, or text into an existing graph (page 3-6-1) — Analysis - Sketch Obtain the root ( x -intercept) of a graph Y Analysis - G-Solve - Root Obtain the maximum value of a graph U Analysis[...]

  • Seite 246

    20060301 T o do this: T ap this button: Or select this menu item: Specify “AND Plot” as the inequality plot setting — a - Inequality Plot - and Specify “OR Plot” as the inequality plot setting — a - Inequality Plot - or Re-draw a graph — a - ReDraw Make the Graph Editor window active ! — Generate a number table for an existing graph[...]

  • Seite 247

    20060301 3-1-7 Graph & T able Application Ov er view Graph & T able Application Status Bar The status bar at the bottom of the Graph & Table application shows the current angle unit setting and [Complex Format] setting (page 1-9-5). Graph & T able Application Basic Operations This section explains how to input a function on the Grap[...]

  • Seite 248

    20060301 Example 1: To input the function y = 3 x 2 on Sheet 1 and graph it u ClassP ad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap T . • This starts the Graph & Table application. (2) In the Graph Editor window, tap the input box immediately to the right of line number y 1. • This locates the cursor in the input box for line y 1. 3-1-8 G[...]

  • Seite 249

    20060301 3-1-9 Graph & T able Application Ov er view (4) Tap $ . • This graphs the expression. The expression is displayed in the message box while the graph is being drawn. Tip • The Graph window message box is for both input and output. It displays information about the function and other information. You can also use it to edit the funct[...]

  • Seite 250

    20060301 Example 2: To input the function r = 3sin2 into line 2 of Sheet 1 and graph it In Example 1, we graphed a rectangular expression in the form of y = f ( x ). You can also input polar coordinate expressions, inequalities, and other types of functions for graphing as well. In this example, we input and graph the polar coordinate expression r [...]

  • Seite 251

    20060301 3-1-11 Graph & T able Application Ov er view (4) Tap $ . • Since there are check marks next to both “ y 1” and “ r 2”, both expre ssions are graphed.[...]

  • Seite 252

    20060301 3-2-1 Using the Graph Window 3-2 Using the Graph Window This section explains Graph window operations, including configuring display settings, scrolling, zooming the image, and more. Configuring View Window P arameters for the Graph Window The View Window dialog box lets you specify the maximum and minimum values for each axis, the space[...]

  • Seite 253

    20060301 3-2-2 Using the Graph Window P olar Coordinates and Parametric Coor dinates T o select this type of graph: x -log graph y -log graph xy -log graph Do this: Select the x -log check box. • This automatically sets “xdot” and “xscale” to “Auto”. Select the y -log check box. • This automatically sets “ydot” and “yscale” [...]

  • Seite 254

    20060301 u View Windo w parameter precautions • An error occurs if you input 0 for t θ step. • An error also occurs if you input a value that is out of range for a parameter, if you input a minus sign only, or if you perform any other illegal input. • An error occurs if ymin is greater than or equal to the ymax. The same is also true for the[...]

  • Seite 255

    20060301 3-2-4 Using the Graph Window u T o standardize the View Windo w (1) On the application menu, tap T . (2) Tap 6 . This displays the View Window dialog box. (3) Tap [Memory] and then [Standard]. This applies the standard View Window parameters shown below. xmin = – 10 xmax = 10 xscale = 1 xdot = 0.12987012987 ymin = – 10 ymax = 10 yscale[...]

  • Seite 256

    20060301 3-2-5 Using the Graph Window u T o recall a setup from View Window memory (1) On the application menu, tap T . (2) Tap 6 . This displays the View Window dialog box. (3) Tap [Memory] and then [Recall]. This displays a list of names of the View Window setups you have stored in memory. (4) Select the name of the setup you want, and then tap [[...]

  • Seite 257

    20060301 3-2-6 Using the Graph Window P anning the Graph Windo w Placing the stylus against the Graph window and dragging causes the window to scroll automatically in the direction you drag. u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap the Graph window to make it active. (2) Tap T . (3) Holding the stylus anywhere against the Graph window, drag it in the direction[...]

  • Seite 258

    20060301 3-2-7 Using the Graph Window Zoom Command Description Box F actor Zoom In Zoom Out Auto Original Square Round Integer Previous Quick Initializ e Quick T rig Quick log ( x ) Quick e^ x Quick x ^2 Quick – x ^2 Quick Standard With “bo x zoom”, y ou draw a selection boundary around the area you would like to enlarge . This causes the sel[...]

  • Seite 259

    20060301 3-2-8 Using the Graph Window u T o use factor zoom Example: To enlarge the graphs of the following two expressions, by a factor of 5 in both directions, to determine whether they come into contact with each other y 1 = ( x + 4)( x + 1)( x – 3) y 2 = 3 x + 22 (1) On the application menu, tap T . (2) On the Graph Editor window, input y 1 =[...]

  • Seite 260

    20060301 3-2-9 Using the Graph Window (6) Input 5 for both the x Factor and y Factor, and then tap [OK]. (7) Tap T , and then use the stylus to dr ag the screen image so the par t you want to zoom is in the center of the screen. (8) Tap [Zoom] and then [Zoom In]. Factor Zoom Result View Window Parameter V alues Command Quick Initializ e Quick T rig[...]

  • Seite 261

    20060301 3-2-10 Using the Graph Window k Using Other Zoom Menu Commands The [Auto], [Original], [Square], [Round], [Integer], and [Previous] zoom commands are executed as soon as you tap one of them on the Graph window’s [Zoom] menu. For information about what each command does, see “Zoom Commands” on page 3-2-7. Tip • For auto zoom, you[...]

  • Seite 262

    20060301 k Redrawing a Graph Use the following procedure to redraw a graph when necessary. u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap the Graph window to make it active. (2) Tap a and then [ReDraw]. • While the Graph Editor window is active, you can redraw the graph by tapping $ . Important! • Use the a - [ReDraw] command to redraw a graph that you drew by d[...]

  • Seite 263

    20060301 3-3 Storing Functions Use the Graph Editor window to store a Graph & Table application function. This section covers Graph Editor operations, and explains how to store functions. Using Graph Editor Sheets The Graph Editor window has five tabbed sheets named Sheet 1 through Sheet 5, each of which can contain up to 20 functions. You can[...]

  • Seite 264

    20060301 k Returning Sheets to Their Default Names The procedure below returns the sheet names to their initial default names (Sheet 1 through Sheet 5). u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap the Graph Editor window to make it active. (2) Tap a , [Sheet], and then [Default Name]. • This returns the currently active sheet to its default name. k Initializing[...]

  • Seite 265

    20060301 u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap T . (2) On the Graph Editor window, tap the down arrow next to “ y =”, or tap [Type]. (3) On the list that appears, tap the function type you want to select. Storing a Function This section presents a number of examples that illustrate how to store a Graph & Table application fu[...]

  • Seite 266

    20060301 u T o store an x = equation Example: To store x = 3 y in line x 4 (1) On the Graph Editor window, tap [Type] and then [ x =Type] to specify an x = equation. (2) Tap the box to the right of line number “ x 4”, and then input the equation: 3y . (3) Press E to store the equation. u T o store an inequality Example: To store the inequality [...]

  • Seite 267

    20060301 Using Built-in Functions Your ClassPad is pre-programmed with the commonly used functions listed below. You can recall a built-in function, save it to an Graph Editor sheet, assign values to its coefficients, and graph the results. y = a·x + b y = a·x ^ 2 + b·x + c y = a·x ^ 3 + b·x ^ 2 + c·x + d y = a· sin ( b·x + c ) + d y = a·[...]

  • Seite 268

    20060301 u T o save an e xpression from the message box to the Graph Editor windo w (1) Tap the Graph window to make it active. (2) Perform a Trace operation (see “3-7 Using Trace”) or any other operation that causes the message box to appear. (3) Tap inside the message box to select the entire expression or drag the stylus across the part of t[...]

  • Seite 269

    20060301 Deleting All Graph Editor Expressions Use the following procedure to delete all of the expressions on all Graph Editor sheets, and initialize all of the sheet names. (1) On the Graph Editor window, tap [Edit] and then [Clear All]. (2) In response to the confirmation dialog box that appears, tap [OK] to delete all expressions and initializ[...]

  • Seite 270

    20060301 k Specifying the Function Y ou W ant to Graph On the Graph Editor window, you can select one or more functions for graphing by selecting their check boxes. The functions whose check boxes are cleared are not graphed. • This check box is selected, so the function next to it will be graphed when you tap $ . If you do not want to graph this[...]

  • Seite 271

    20060301 k Quic k Graphing of an Expression Using Drag and Drop You can use the following procedure to graph a single function, even when you have multiple functions selected on the Graph Editor window. u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap the tab of the sheet that contains the function you want to graph to make it active. (2) Drag the function you want to[...]

  • Seite 272

    20060301 3-3-10 Storing Functions (3) Tap $ . AND Plot OR Plot[...]

  • Seite 273

    20060301 k Shading the Region Bounded b y T wo Expressions You can shade the region bounded by two expressions by specifying [ShadeType] as the function type and then inputting the expressions in the syntax shown below. Syntax: y a {lower function f ( x ), upper function g ( x )} | A < x < B The value of B must be greater than A. • A < x[...]

  • Seite 274

    20060301 3-3-12 Storing Functions k Using the Draw Shade Dialog Bo x to Shade the Region Bounded by T w o Expressions In this case, you input the expressions on a Draw Shade dialog box instead of the Graph Editor Window. Example: To graph f ( x ) = –1, g ( x ) = 1, –1 < x < 1 u ClassPad Operation (1) On the a menu, tap [Draw Shade]. • T[...]

  • Seite 275

    20060301 k Dr opping an Expression from the Main Application W ork Area into the Graph Window • You can graph a polar coordinate expression by dragging it from the Main Application work area and dropping it into the Graph window. • If there are multiple expressions in the same Main Application work area line, all of the expressions will be grap[...]

  • Seite 276

    20060301 Saving Graph Editor Data to Graph Memory Graph memory lets you store all of the expressions and their related information to a file for later recall. Each graph memory file contains the following data: • Functions on all five Graph Editor sheets (up to 100 functions) • Whether the check box next to each function is selected (checked[...]

  • Seite 277

    20060301 3-4-1 Using T able & Graph For details about using the Stat Editor, see Chapter 7. 3-4 Using T able & Graph The Graph & Table application includes a “Table window” for displaying number tables and summary tables generated with the functions you input on the Graph Editor window. Generating a Number T able You can use either [...]

  • Seite 278

    20060301 u T o generate a number table b y specifying a rang e of values f or x using the T able Input dialog box Example: To generate a number table for the function y = 3 x 2 – 2 as the value of x changes from –3 to 1 in increments of 1 (1) On the application menu, tap T . (2) In line y 1 of the Graph Editor window, input and save y = 3 x 2 ?[...]

  • Seite 279

    20060301 u T o generate a number table b y assigning list values to x (1) Create and save the list of values to be assigned. list1 = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (2) In line y 1 of the Graph & Table application Graph Editor window, input and save y = 3 x 2 – 2. (3) Specify the list that contains the values you want to assign to x (list1 in this example). ?[...]

  • Seite 280

    20060301 k T able Generation Precautions • Table generation is performed using the currently selected function that is of the current function type selected on the Graph Editor window toolbar. • Though the selected current function type is “ y =” in the above screenshot, there is no “ y =” type function selected on the Graph Editor wind[...]

  • Seite 281

    20060301 3-4-5 Using T able & Graph Tip • An error message appears and the number table contents are not changed if you enter an illegal value for x (such as 6 ÷ 0). • The data in a “Y” column (Y1, Y2, etc.) of a table cannot be modified. Deleting, Inser ting, and Adding Number T able Lines You can use the following procedures to dele[...]

  • Seite 282

    20060301 3-4-6 Using T able & Graph u T o add a number tab le line (1) Tap the x -value of the bottom line of the number table. (2) Tap [T-Fact] and then [Add]. • After adding a new line, you can edit the x -value, if you want. For more information, see “Editing Number Table Values” on page 3-4-4. • You can add a line anywhere. When you[...]

  • Seite 283

    20060301 Generating a Number T able and Using It to Draw a Graph After using a function to generate a number table, you can use the number table values to draw a graph. You can use number table values to draw two different types of graphs: a “connect type graph” on which points are connected by lines, or a “plot type graph” on which points [...]

  • Seite 284

    20060301 (6) Specify the graph type. • To specify a connect type graph, tap [Graph] and then [G-Connect], or tap $ . To specify a plot type graph, tap [Graph] and then [G-Plot], or tap ! . • This draws the graph on the Graph window. Saving a Number T able to a List You can use the following procedure to save a particular column of a number tabl[...]

  • Seite 285

    20060301 (2) Tap a and then [Table to List]. • This displays a dialog box for specifying a variable name. 3-4-9 Using T able & Graph (3) Enter the name you want to give to the variable, and then tap [OK]. • This assigns the list of data you selected to a variable with the name you specified. • If the variable name you input has not been [...]

  • Seite 286

    20060301 u Specifying all x -values This method generates a reference table by looking up data store d in a list. A LIST variable is used to specify the x -values. When using this method, it is up to you specify all of the correct x -values required to generate the summary table. The summary table will not be generated correctly if you provide inco[...]

  • Seite 287

    20060301 (4) Tap [Memory] and then [Auto]. • This causes all settings on the View Window dialog box to change to “Auto”. 3-4-11 Using T able & Graph (5) Tap the [OK] button to close the View Window dialog box. (6) Tap u to toggle to toolbar 2 and then tap 4 . • This starts summary table generation, and displays the result on the Table w[...]

  • Seite 288

    20060301 • Tapping $ here graphs the function using the View Window settings automatically configured for summary table generation. 3-4-12 Using T able & Graph Important! • A monotone increasing function or other special function may not be solvable by the ClassPad’s internal summary table calculation. If this happens, use the procedure [...]

  • Seite 289

    20060301 • For this example, we will specify xmin = –0.5 and xmax = 2. (5) Tap the [OK] button to close the View Window dialog box. (6) Tap 4 . • This starts the summary table generation using the range you specified in step (4), and displays the result on the Table window. (3) Tap 6 to display the View Window dialog box. (4) Sp ecify t he x[...]

  • Seite 290

    20060301 k Generating a Summary T ab le by Specifying All of the V alues for x In both of the previous examples, summary table generation is performed using View Window settings to calculate values for x that satisfy the function f  ( x ) = 0. With this table generation method, x -values are not calculated automatically. It is up to you to use a[...]

  • Seite 291

    20060301 (5) Tap the Graph Editor window to make it active. (6) Tap 4 . • This starts summary table generation using the x -values you input in step (4), and displays the result on the Table window. 3-4-15 Using T able & Graph Important! • For the above method to correctly generate a summary table, you must have legal x -values in the list [...]

  • Seite 292

    20060301 3-5 Modifying a Graph A graph can be modified in real time as you change its coefficients and/or the variables. The Graph & Table application provides you with two methods for modifying a graph. Direct Modify “Direct Modify” changes the coefficient in the equation of the original graph. This method can be used when you are modif[...]

  • Seite 293

    20060301 3-5-2 Modifying a Graph T o do this: T ap the right graph controller arrow . T ap the left graph controller arro w . Do this: Decrease the value of the coefficient Increase the value of the coefficient • You can use the Dynamic Graph dialog box on page 3-5-4 to change the increment, if you want. (6) Input the amount of change (step) in t[...]

  • Seite 294

    20060301 (9) To modify the y 2 graph (2 x + 1), tap the down graph controller arrow to make it the graph active. • You can use the up and down cursor keys or graph controller arrows to switch between the two graphs, as required. • Repeat steps (7) and (8) to modify the currently selected graph. Tap . Tap . 3-5-3 Modifying a Graph (10) To quit g[...]

  • Seite 295

    20060301 Simultaneousl y Modifying Multiple Graphs by Changing Common V ariables (Dynamic Modify) Use the procedure below to change the values of up to two common variables used in multiple functions to simultaneously modify the graphs. u T o modify multiple graphs sim ultaneously Example: To graph the functions y = a x 2 – b and y = a x + b , an[...]

  • Seite 296

    20060301 (10) Tap [OK]. • This displays a WARNING! dialog box for overwriting variable a . 3-5-5 Modifying a Graph • This graphs the functions using the a and b variable start values you specified on the Dynamic Graph dialog box, and displays “Modify” on the Graph window. … … … … e e e e (13) Modify the graphs by changing the value[...]

  • Seite 297

    20060301 3-5-6 Modifying a Graph with the settings you configure on the Dynamic Graph dialog box. u ClassPad Operation (1) Perform steps (1) through (9) under “To modify multiple graphs simultaneously” on page 3-5-4. (2) On the Dynamic Graph dialog box, tap the [Auto] option. k Cycling Thr ough Graph Chang es Automaticall y Use the following p[...]

  • Seite 298

    20060301 Clear figures and text y ou hav e added using the sketch feature Plot a point on the Graph window Draw a line on the Graph windo w Write text on the Graph windo w Draw a line that is tangent to a particular point on a graph Draw a line that is normal to a par ticular point on a graph Draw a circle Draw a v er tical line Draw a horizontal l[...]

  • Seite 299

    20060301 3-6-2 Using the Sketch Menu u T o draw a line on the Graph windo w (1) While the Graph window is active, tap [Analysis], [Sketch], and then [Line]. (2) On the Graph window, tap the start point of the line and then tap the end point. This causes a straight line to be dra wn between the two points. The message box shows the equation of the l[...]

  • Seite 300

    20060301 u T o draw a line tangent to a graph Example: To draw a line tangent to the graph y = x 2 – x – 2 when x = 1 (1) In line y 1 of the Graph Editor window, input and save y = x 2 – x – 2. (2) Tap $ to graph the function. (3) Tap [Analysis], [Sketch], and then [Tangent]. • This displays the crosshair pointer along with its correspond[...]

  • Seite 301

    20060301 u T o graph the in verse of a function Example: To graph y = x 2 – x – 2 and then overlay it with x = y 2 – y – 2 (1) In line y 1 of the Graph Editor window, input and save y = x 2 – x – 2. (2) Tap $ to graph the function. (3) Tap [Analysis], [Sketch], and then [Inverse]. • This graphs the inverse function. The message box br[...]

  • Seite 302

    20060301 u T o dra w a ver tical or horizontal line Example: To draw a vertical line at x = 2 (1) While the Graph window is active, tap [Analysis], [Sketch], and then [Vertical]. • This displays “Vertical” on the Graph window, and the ClassPad waits for you to draw the vertical line. (2) Press 2 . • This displays a dialog box for specifying[...]

  • Seite 303

    20060301 3-7 Using T race Trace lets you move a point along a graph and displays the coordinates for the current pointer location. You can also link the trace operation to the number table used to draw a graph, so the pointer jumps to the coordinates that are currently selected in the table. Using T race to Read Graph Coordinates Starting the trace[...]

  • Seite 304

    20060301 • You can also move the pointer to a particular point by inputting coordinates. Pressing a number key displays a dialog box for inputting coordinates. Input the values you want and then tap [OK]. • When there are multiple graphs on the Graph window, you can use the up and down cursor keys or the up and down graph controller arrows to m[...]

  • Seite 305

    20060301 Linking T race to a Number T ab le This section explains how you can link the movement of the trace pointer to the values in the number table used to draw the graph. This type of operation is called “linked trace”. • For information about generating a number table and performing other table operations, see “3-4 Using Table & Gr[...]

  • Seite 306

    20060301 Generating Number T able V alues from a Graph A “graph-to-table” feature l ets you extract the coordinate values at the current pointer location and input them into a table. Example: Generate a table and graph for the expression y = x 3 – 3 x , and input the coordinates for specific points on the graph into a table Use the initial V[...]

  • Seite 307

    20060301 (4) Tap the Graph window to make it active. Next, tap [Analysis] and then [Trace]. • This causes a pointer to appear on the graph. (5) Use the cursor key to move the pointer along the graph until it reaches a point whose coordinates you want to input into the table. (6) Press E to input the coordinates at the current cursor position at t[...]

  • Seite 308

    20060301 3-8 Analyzing a Function Used to Dra w a Graph Your ClassPad includes a G-Solve feature that lets you perform a variety of different analytical processes on an existing graph. G-Solve Menu Overview To access the [G-Solve] menu, tap [Analysis] and then [G-Solve]. The following describes the commands that are available on the [G-Solve] menu.[...]

  • Seite 309

    20060301 Using G-Solve Menu Commands This section describes how to use each of the commands on the [G-Solve] menu. Note that all of the procedures in this section are performed in the Graph & Table application, which you can enter by tapping the T icon on the application menu. u T o obtain the r oot of a function Example: To graph the function [...]

  • Seite 310

    20060301 u T o obtain the minimum v alue, maxim um value, f Max, f Min, y -intercept, and inflection of a function Example: To graph the function y = x 2 ( x + 2)( x – 2) and obtain its minimum value (1) Display the View Window dialog box, and then configure it with the following parameters. xmin = –7.7, xmax = 7.7, xscale = 1 ymin = –3.8, [...]

  • Seite 311

    20060301 u T o obtain the point of inter section for two graphs Example: To graph the functions y = x + 1 and y = x 2 , and determine their point of intersection (1) Display the View Window dialog box, and then configure it with the following parameters. xmin = –5, xmax = 5, xscale = 1 ymin = –5, ymax = 5, yscale = 2 (2) On the Graph Editor wi[...]

  • Seite 312

    20060301 u T o determine coor dinates at a par ticular point on a graph Example: To graph the function y = x ( x + 2)( x – 2) and determine the y -coordinate when x = 0.5, and the x -coordinate when y = 2.2 (1) Display the View Window dialog box, and then configure it with the following parameters. xmin = –7.7, xmax = 7.7, xscale = 1 ymin = ?[...]

  • Seite 313

    20060301 u T o determine the definite integral f or a par ticular domain Example: To graph the function y = x ( x + 2)( x – 2) and obtain its definite integral in the domain of 1 < x < 2 (1) Display the View Window dialog box, and then configure it with the following parameters. xmin = –7.7, xmax = 7.7, xscale = 1 ymin = –4, ymax = 4[...]

  • Seite 314

    20060301 u T o determine the distance between an y two points (1) Tap the Graph window to make it active. (2) Tap [Analysis], [G-Solve], and then [Distance]. • This displays “Distance” on the Graph window, and the ClassPad waits for you to specify the first point. (3) Tap the first point on the Graph window. • This causes a pointer to app[...]

  • Seite 315

    20060301 3-8-8 Analyzing a Function Used to Draw a Gr aph (2) On the Graph Editor window, input and store y 1 = x 3 – 1 into line y 1, and then tap $ to graph it. • Make sure that only “ y 1” is selected (checked). (3) Tap [Analysis], [G-Solve], and then [Inflection]. • This causes “Inflection” to appear on the Graph window, with a [...]

  • Seite 316

    20060301 (4) Press 1 . • This displays a dialog box for inputting an interval of values for x , with 1 specified for the lower limit of the x -axis (Lower). (5) Tap the [Upper] input box and then input 2 for the upper limit of the x -axis. (6) Tap [OK]. • This causes a silhouette of the solid of revolution to appear on the Graph window, and it[...]

  • Seite 317

    20060301 Using the Conics Application The Conics application provides you with the capability to graph circular, parabolic, elliptic, and hyperbolic functions. You can also use the Conics application to quickly and easily determine the proper focal point, vertex, directrix, axis of symmetry, latus rectum, center, radius, asymptote, eccentricity, an[...]

  • Seite 318

    20060301 4-1 Conics Application Over view This section describes the configuration of the Conics application windows, and provides basic information about its menus and commands. • The Conics application uses many of the same commands (Zoom, Trace, Sketch, etc.) as the Graph & Table application. It is recommended that you familiarize yoursel[...]

  • Seite 319

    20060301 4-1-2 Conics Application Overview Conics Application Menus and Buttons This section explains the operations you can perform using the menus and buttons of the Conics application window. • For information about the O menu, see “Using the O Menu” on page 1-5-4. k Conics Editor Windo w Menus and Buttons The following describes the menu [...]

  • Seite 320

    20060301 Zoom - Square — Zoom - Round Zoom - Integer — Zoom - Previous Zoom - Quick Initializ e — Zoom - Quick T rig Zoom - Quick log( x ) — Zoom - Quick e^ x Zoom - Quick x ^2 — Zoom - Quick – x ^2 — — — — — — = Analysis - T race — Analysis - Sketch — Analysis - G-Solve Inser t a point, graphic, or te xt into an exist i[...]

  • Seite 321

    20060301 — a - Store Picture — a - Recall Picture a - ReDraw " O - View Window O - Variable Manager * O - Conics Editor 6 — T — Display the View Window dialog box (page 3-2-1) to configure Graph window settings Activate the pan function for dragging the Graph window with the stylus Save a graph as image data (page 3-2-10) Recall the im[...]

  • Seite 322

    20060301 4-2-1 Inputting Equations 4-2 Inputting Equations This section explains the various ways you can input equations using the Conics Editor window. Using a Conics Form to Input an Equation Preset formats can help you input conics equations quickly and easily. The following table contains a complete list of the types of equations that you can [...]

  • Seite 323

    20060301 4-2-2 Inputting Equations u T o input an equation using a Conics Form Example: To use a Conics Form to input the equation for a parabola with a horizontal axis (principal axis parallel with x -axis) (1) On the application menu, tap C to start the Conics application. (2) On the Conics Editor window, tap q , or tap [Form] and then [Insert Co[...]

  • Seite 324

    20060301 4-2-3 Inputting Equations Inputting an Equation Manually To input an equation manually, make the Conics Editor window active, and then use the soft keyboard for input. T ransforming a Manuall y Input Equation to a Conics Form After you manually input an equation on the Conics Editor window, you can use the procedure below to transform it t[...]

  • Seite 325

    20060301 4-3-1 Drawing a Conics Gr aph 4-3 Drawing a Conics Graph This section provides examples that show how to draw various types of conics graphs. Drawing a P arabola A parabola can be drawn with either a horizontal or vertical orientation. The parabola type is determined by the direction of its principal axis. k Drawing a P arabola that Opens [...]

  • Seite 326

    20060301 4-3-2 Drawing a Conics Gr aph Example 2: To draw the parabola x = y 2 + 2 y + 3 u ClassPad Operation (1) In step (2) of the above procedure, select “X = AY 2 + BY + C” on the Select Conics Form dialog box. (2) In step (3) of the above procedure, change the coefficients of the equation as follows: A = 1, B = 2, C = 3.[...]

  • Seite 327

    20060301 k Drawing a P arabola that Opens V ertically A parabola with a vertical axis is one whose principal axis is parallel to the y -axis. There are two possible equations for a parabola with a vertical axis: y = A( x – H) 2 + K and y = A x 2 + B x +C. u ClassPad Operation (1) In step (2) of the procedure under “Drawing a Parabola that Opens[...]

  • Seite 328

    20060301 4-3-4 Drawing a Conics Gr aph Drawing a Cir cle There are two forms that you can use to draw a circle. One form is the standard form, which allows you to specify the center point and radius. The other form is the general form, which allows you to specify the coefficients of each term. k Drawing a Cir cle by Specifying a Center P oint and [...]

  • Seite 329

    20060301 k Drawing a Cir cle by Specifying the Coefficients of a General Equation Example: To draw the circle x 2 + y 2 + 4 x – 6 y + 9 = 0 u ClassPad Operation (1) In step (2) of the procedure under “Drawing a Circle by Specifying a Center Point and Radius”, select “AX 2 + AY 2 + BX + CY + D = 0”. (2) Substitute the following values for[...]

  • Seite 330

    20060301 4-3-6 Drawing a Conics Gr aph Drawing a Hyperbola A hyperbola can be drawn with either a horizontal or vertical orientation. The hyperbola type is determined by the direction of its principal axis. k Drawing a Hyperbola that Opens Horizontall y The standard form of a hyperbola with a horizontal axis is: Example: To draw the hyperbola with [...]

  • Seite 331

    20060301 4-3-7 Drawing a Conics Gr aph k Drawing a Hyperbola that Opens V er tically The standard form of a hyperbola with a vertical axis is: u ClassP ad Operation (1) In step (2) of the procedure under “Drawing a Hyperbola that Opens Horizontally”, select “ ”. (2) Specify values for the coefficients. ( y – K) 2 – ( x – H) 2 = 1.[...]

  • Seite 332

    20060301 4-3-8 Drawing a Conics Gr aph Drawing a General Conics Using the conics general equation A x 2 + B xy + C y 2 + D x + E y + F = 0, you can draw a parabola or hyperbola whose principal axis is not parallel either to the x -axis or the y -axis, a slanted ellipse, etc. Example: To draw x 2 + 4 xy + y 2 – 6 x + 6 y + 4 = 0 u ClassPad Operati[...]

  • Seite 333

    20060301 4-4-1 Using T race to Read Graph Coordinates 4-4 Using T race to Read Graph Coordinates Trace allows you m ove a pointer along a graph line an d display the coordinates at the c urrent pointer location. Starting the trace operation causes a crosshair pointer ( ) to appear on the graph. You can then press the cursor key or tap the graph con[...]

  • Seite 334

    20060301 4-5-1 Using G-Solve to Analyz e a Conics Graph 4-5 Using G-Solve to Analyze a Conics Graph The G-Solve menu includes commands that let you perform a variety of different analytical processes on a graph drawn on the Conics Graph window. Displaying the G-Solve Men u While there is a graph on the Conics Graph window, tap [Analysis] and then [[...]

  • Seite 335

    20060301 4-5-2 Using G-Solve to Analyz e a Conics Graph Using G-Solve Menu Commands The following are some examples of how to perform the Conics application [G-Solve] menu commands. u T o determine the focus of the parabola x = 2( y – 1) 2 – 2 (1) On the Conics Editor window, input the conics equation and then tap ^ to graph it. • Here, input[...]

  • Seite 336

    20060301 4-5-3 Using G-Solve to Analyz e a Conics Graph u T o determine the directrix of the parabola x = 2( y – 1) 2 – 2 [Analysis] - [G-Solve] - [Directrix] u T o determine the axis of symmetry of the parabola x = 2( y – 1) 2 – 2 [Analysis] - [G-Solve] - [Symmetry] u T o determine the latus rectum of the parabola x = 2( y – 1) 2 – 2 [[...]

  • Seite 337

    20060301 u T o determine the asymptotes of the hyperbola [Analysis] - [G-Solve] - [Asymptotes] u T o determine the eccentricity of the ellipse [Analysis] - [G-Solve] - [Eccentricity] u T o determine the x -intercept of the parabola x = 2( y – 1) 2 – 2 [Analysis] - [G-Solve] - [ x -Intercept] Tip • When there are two x -intercepts, press the l[...]

  • Seite 338

    20060301 u For the hyperbola , determine the x -coordinate when the y -coordinate is 0 [Analysis] - [G-Solve] - [ x -Cal] Tip • When there are two x -coordinates, press the left and right cursor keys or tap the left and right graph controller arrows to toggle the display between them. u For the hyperbola , determine the y -coordinate when the x -[...]

  • Seite 339

    20060301 Using the 3D Graph Application The 3D Graph application lets you draw a 3-dimensional graph of an equation in the form z = f ( x , y ) or of a parametric equation. 5-1 3D Graph Application Overview 5-2 Inputting an Expression 5-3 Drawing a 3D Graph 5-4 Manipulating a Graph on the 3D Graph Window 5-5 Other 3D Graph Application Functions 5 C[...]

  • Seite 340

    20060301 5-1 3D Graph Application Over view This section describes the configuration of the 3D Graph application window, and provides basic information about its menus and commands. 5-1-1 3D Graph Application Ov er view 3D Graph Application Window The 3D Graph application has a 3D Graph Editor window and a 3D Graph window. Both of these windows ap[...]

  • Seite 341

    20060301 5-1-2 3D Graph Application Ov er view 3D Graph Application Menus and Buttons This section explains the operations you can perform using the menus and buttons of the 3D Graph application’s windows. • For information about the O menu, see “Using the O Menu” on page 1-5-4. k 3D Graph Editor Windo w Menus and Buttons The following desc[...]

  • Seite 342

    20060301 5-1-3 3D Graph Application Ov er view k 3D Graph Windo w Menus and Buttons The following describes the menu and button operations you can perform while the 3D Graph window is active. T o do this: T ap this button: Or select this menu item: W Zoom - Zoom In E Zoom - Zoom Out — Zoom - View- x — Zoom - View- y — Zoom - View- z — Zoom [...]

  • Seite 343

    20060301 3D Graph Application Status Bar The status bar at the bottom of the 3D Graph application shows the current angle unit setting and [Complex Format] setting (page 1-9-5). Rad Deg Gra Real The angle unit setting is radians. The angle unit setting is degrees. The angle unit setting is grads . Cplx The Complex (comple x number calculation) mode[...]

  • Seite 344

    20060301 5-2-1 Inputting an Expression 5-2 Inputting an Expression Use the 3D Graph Editor window to input 3D Graph application expressions. Using 3D Graph Editor Sheets The 3D Graph Editor has five tabbed sheets named Sheet 1 through Sheet 5. Each sheet can contain up to 20 functions. This means you can have up to 100 functions stored in the 3D G[...]

  • Seite 345

    20060301 5-2-2 Inputting an Expression Storing a Function You can input an equation of the form z = f ( x , y ) or a parametric equation. Example: To store z = x 2 + y 2 in line z 1 u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap D . • This starts up the 3D Graph application and displays the initial screen of the active 3D Graph Editor wind[...]

  • Seite 346

    20060301 5-3-1 Drawing a 3D Gr aph 5-3 Drawing a 3D Graph This section explains how to draw a 3D graph, as well as how to change the angle of a graph and how to rotate a graph. Configuring 3D Graph View Window P arameters Use the 3D Graph View Window to specify maximum and minimum values for the x -axis, y -axis, z -axis, s -variable, and t -varia[...]

  • Seite 347

    20060301 5-3-2 Drawing a 3D Gr aph • The following are the allowable ranges for the indicated View Window parameters: xgrid and ygrid: 2 to 50; angle θ : – 180 < θ < 180; angle φ : 0 to 360. • The angle parameters, θ and φ , are always degrees, regardless of the current [Angle] setting of the Basic Format dialog box (page 1-9-5). ([...]

  • Seite 348

    20060301 3D Graph Example Example 1: To graph the hyperbolic paraboloid z = x 2 /2 – y 2 /8. u ClassPad Operation (1) In the 3D Graph application, make the 3D Graph Editor window active. (2) Tap 7 to display the View Window dialog box, and then configure the parameters shown below. xmin = –3 xmax = 3 xgrid = 25 ymin = –3 ymax = 3 ygrid = 25 [...]

  • Seite 349

    20060301 Example 2: To graph a parametric equation u ClassP ad Operation (1) In the 3D Graph application, make the 3D Graph Editor window active. (2) Tap to specify input of a parametric equation. (3) Tap line Xst1, and then input sin( t ) × cos( s ).   k 9T s t )* c s ) (4) Press E . (5) In line Yst1 input cos( t ) × cos( s ).   c t [...]

  • Seite 350

    20060301 5-3-5 Drawing a 3D Gr aph k Selecting the Function to be Graphed The 3D Graph application lets you graph only one function at a time. When you have more than one expression input on the 3D Graph Editor window, you need to select the one you want to graph. Tapping the “ ” button next to a function changes the button to “ ”, which in[...]

  • Seite 351

    20060301 5-4-1 Manipulating a Graph on the 3D Graph Window 5-4 Manipulating a Graph on the 3D Graph Window This section describes how to enlarge and reduce the size of a graph, how to change the eye position to view the graph along a particular axis, and how to perform other operations like automatic rotation. Important! • All of the operations d[...]

  • Seite 352

    20060301 5-4-2 Manipulating a Graph on the 3D Graph Window • To view the graph facing the y -axis, tap [Zoom] and then [View- y ], or press the y key. • To view the graph facing the z -axis, tap [Zoom] and then [View- z ], or press the Z key. Rotating the Graph Manually Use the procedures described below to rotate the displayed graph manually. [...]

  • Seite 353

    20060301 5-4-3 Manipulating a Graph on the 3D Graph Window Rotating a Graph A utomatically You can use the following procedure to rotate a graph automatically for about 30 seconds. u ClassP ad Operation (1) To start automatic graph rotation, tap a and then [Rotating]. (2) On the submenu that appears, select the rotation direction you want: [Left[...]

  • Seite 354

    20060301 5-5-1 Other 3D Graph Application Functions 5-5 Other 3D Graph Application Functions Using T race to Read Graph Coordinates Starting the trace operation causes a crosshair pointer to appear on the graph. You can then press a cursor key or tap the graph controller arrows to move the pointer to the location you want, and read the coordinates [...]

  • Seite 355

    20060301 5-5-2 Other 3D Graph Application Functions Calculating a z -value f or Particular x - and y -values, or s - and t -v alues Use the following procedure to calculate a z -value for given x - and y -values on the displayed graph. u ClassP ad Operation (1) Draw the graph and make the 3D Graph window active. (2) Tap [Analysis], and then [ z [...]

  • Seite 356

    20060301 Using Drag and Dr op to Draw a 3D Graph Dropping an equation of the form z = f ( x , y ) into the 3D Graph window will graph the equation. 5-5-3 Other 3D Graph Application Functions[...]

  • Seite 357

    20060301 6 Using the Sequence Application The Sequence application provides you with the tools you need to work with explicit sequences and recursive type sequences. 6-1 Sequence Application Overview 6-2 Inputting an Expression in the Sequence Application 6-3 Recursive and Explicit Form of a Sequence 6-4 Using LinkT race 6-5 Drawing a Cobweb Dia gr[...]

  • Seite 358

    20060301 6-1-1 Sequence Application Overview 6-1 Sequence Application Overview This section describes the configuration of the Sequence application window, and provides basic information about its menus and commands. Starting up the Sequence Application Use the following procedure to start up the Sequence application. u ClassP ad Operation On the [...]

  • Seite 359

    20060301 6-1-2 Sequence Application Overview k Sequence Editor Window Menus and Buttons O Menu Cut the currently selected object and place it onto the clipboard* Cop y the currently selected object and place it onto the clipboard* P aste the current clipboard contents onto the screen Select all objects on the screen* Clear the active windo w Cut Co[...]

  • Seite 360

    20060301 Buttons 6-1-3 Sequence Application Overview T o do this: T ap this b utton: Create an ordered pair table Create an arithmetic sequence table Create a geometric sequence table Create a progression of difference table Create a Fibonacci sequence table Draw a cobweb diagram on a graph Specify a n + 1 a 0 as the recursion type Specify a n + 1 [...]

  • Seite 361

    20060301 k Sequence Graph Window Menus and Buttons Edit Menu The commands on this menu are identical to those for the Sequence Editor window [Edit] menu described on page 6-1-2. Zoom Menu The commands on this menu are identical to those for the Graph & Table application [Zoom] menu described on page 3-1-4. Analysis Menu The [Analysis] menu incl[...]

  • Seite 362

    20060301 Input a recursion system variab le a 0 , a 1 , a 2 , b 0 , b 1 , b 2 , c 0 , c 1 , or c 2 T o do this: Select one of these a 0 , a 1 menu items : Buttons T o do this: T ap this b utton: Create a sequence table Display the Sequence Editor windo w Display the Sequence T able Input dialog box Display the Vie w Windo w dialog box & 8 6 # v[...]

  • Seite 363

    20060301 Sequence Application Status Bar The status bar at the bottom of the Sequence application shows the current angle unit setting and [Complex Format] setting (page 1-9-5). 6-1-6 Sequence Application Overview Angle unit Real mode Rad Deg Cplx Real The angle unit setting is radians. The angle unit setting is degrees. The Complex (comple x numbe[...]

  • Seite 364

    20060301 6-2 Inputting an Expression in the Sequence Application In the Sequence application, you input expressions using menus and buttons, without using the soft keyboard at the bottom of the window. Inputting Data on the Sequence Editor Window To input an expression, tap the input location you want ((a), (b), or (c)) to locate the cursor there. [...]

  • Seite 365

    20060301 6-3 Recursive and Explicit Form of a Sequence ClassPad supports use of three types of sequence expressions: a n + 1 =, a n + 2 = and a n E . Generating a Number T able In addition to ordered pair tables, the Sequence application provides you with the means to generate arithmetic sequence tables * 1 , geometric sequence tables * 2 , progres[...]

  • Seite 366

    20060301 (8) Tap the down arrow button next to # , and then select ` to create the table. k Other T ab le T ypes The following show what the window looks like after you generate other types of tables. 6-3-2 Recursive and Explicit F orm of a Sequence Ordered Pair Table Arithmetic Sequence Table In the above example, “4 Cells” is selected for the[...]

  • Seite 367

    20060301 Graphing a Recursion An expression can be graphed as a connect type graph (G-Connect) or a plot type graph (G-Plot). Example: To graph a n + 1 = 2 a n +1, a 1 = 1 u ClassP ad Operation (1) Start up the Sequence Editor. • If you have another application running, tap m and then H . • If you have the Sequence application running, tap O[...]

  • Seite 368

    20060301 (7) Configure View Window settings as shown below. xmin = 0 xmax = 6 xscale = 1 xdot: (Specify auto setting.) ymin = –15 ymax = 65 yscale = 5 ydot: (Specify auto setting.) (8) After everything is the way you want, tap [OK]. (9) Tap the down arrow button next to # , and then select + to create the table. (10) Perform one of the following[...]

  • Seite 369

    20060301 Determining the General T erm of a Recur sion Expression The following procedure converts the sequence expressed by a recursion expression to the general term format a n = f ( n ). Example: To determine the general term of the recursion expression a n + 1 = a n + 2, a 1 = 1 u ClassP ad Operation (1) Start up the Sequence Editor. • If [...]

  • Seite 370

    20060301 Calculating the Sum of a Sequence Perform the following steps when you want to determine the sum of a specific range of the sequence of a recursion expression or a general term expression. Example: To calculate the sum of the general term expression a n E = n 2 + 2 n – 1 in the range of 2 < n < 10 u ClassP ad Operation (1) Star[...]

  • Seite 371

    20060301 6-4 Using LinkT race While the Table and Graph windows are on the display, you can activate LinkTrace. To do this, tap in the Table window to make it active. Next, tap a and then [Link]. While LinkTrace is active, the pointer on the Graph window jumps automatically to the point indicated by the coordinates in the currently selected table c[...]

  • Seite 372

    20060301 6-5 Drawing a Cobweb Dia gram You can use the procedure described here to input a sequence and draw a cobweb diagram. Example: To graph , a 1 = 0.5 u ClassP ad Operation (1) Start up the Sequence Editor. • If you have another application running, tap m and then H . • If you have the Sequence application running, tap O and then [Sequ[...]

  • Seite 373

    20060301 Using the Statistics Application This chapter explains how to use the Statistics application. You can use the Statistics application to perform a variety of statistical calculations and to graph statistical data. Numeric data stored in lists can be used to perform Statistics application operations. This chapter also includes information ab[...]

  • Seite 374

    20060301 7-1-1 Statistics Application Overview 7-1 Statistics Application Over view This section describes the configuration of the Statistics application windows and provides basic information about its menus and commands. The Statistics application provides you with the tools you need to perform the operations listed below. You can also use the [...]

  • Seite 375

    20060301 Starting Up the Statistics Application Use the following procedure to start up the Statistics application. u ClassPad Operation On the application menu, tap I . This starts the Statistics application and displays the Stat Editor window. 7-1-2 Statistics Application Overview Line number Cell List name cell (variable name) Line Column[...]

  • Seite 376

    20060301 Stat Editor Window Menus and Buttons This section explains the operations you can perform using the menus and buttons of the Statistical application’s Stat Editor window. 7-1-3 Statistics Application Overview T o do this: T ap this button: Or select this menu item: — Open an existing list (page 7-2-3) Edit - Open List — Close the cur[...]

  • Seite 377

    20060301 Stat Editor Window Status Bar The status bar at the bottom of the Stat Editor window shows the current angle unit setting (page 1-9-5), statistics View Window setting (page 7-3-2), and decimal calculation setting (page 1-9-5). 3 1 2 7-1-4 Statistics Application Overview Rad Deg Auto <blank> Standard Decimal The angle unit setting is [...]

  • Seite 378

    20060301 7-2-1 Using Stat Editor 7-2 Using Stat Editor Lists play a very important role in ClassPad statistical calculations. This section provides an overview of list operations and terminology. It also explains how to use the Stat Editor, a tool for creating and maintaining lists. Basic List Operations This section provides the basics of list ope[...]

  • Seite 379

    20060301 k Creating a List A list starts out with an initia l default name like list1, list2, list3, etc. The Stat Edito r allows you to generate list data (list variables) quickly and easily. Note • The Stat Editor window has six default list variables, named “list1” through “list6”. These lists are system variables that are defined by [...]

  • Seite 380

    20060301 u T o jump to the first or last line of a list (1) Select any cell in the list. (2) On the menu bar, tap [Edit]. (3) Select one of the following commands to perform the type of operation you want. 7-2-3 Using Stat Editor Move the cursor to line 1 of the list Jump to Top Jump to Bottom Select this command: T o do this: Move the cursor to t[...]

  • Seite 381

    20060301 k Closing a List Closing a list saves it under its current list (variable) name. There are two different methods you can use to close a list: using the [Close List] command, and clearing the list name from its list name cell. u T o close a list using the “Close List” command (1) On the Stat Editor window, select any cell of the list yo[...]

  • Seite 382

    20060301 (2) Input the data you want. T o input a v alue • Use the input keypad or soft keyboard that appears when you press k . You can also access the soft keyboard by tapping O Menu. T o input a mathematical e xpression • Use the soft keyboard that appears when you press k . • When the “Decimal Calculation” check box is not selected (u[...]

  • Seite 383

    20060301 7-2-6 Using Stat Editor u T o batch input a set of data Example: To input the values 1, 2, and 3 into list1 (1) On the Stat Editor window, select the “Cal” cell of the list where you want to input the data (list1 in this example). (2) Enter {1,2,3}. • To input braces ({}), press k to display the soft keyboard, and then tap the 9 tab.[...]

  • Seite 384

    20060301 Editing List Contents Use the procedures in this section to delete and insert elements, to clear data, and to sort data. u T o delete a list cell (1) On the Stat Editor window, select the cell you want to delete. (2) Tap [Edit]. (3) On the menu that appears, tap [Delete], and then tap [Cell] on the submenu that appears. • This deletes th[...]

  • Seite 385

    20060301 Tip • Note that inserting a cell does not affect the cells in other lists. If you insert a cell in a list that is aligned with another list, the lists will become misaligned when the cells underneath are shifted downwards. Sorting List Data You can use the procedures in this section to sort the data of a list in ascending or descending o[...]

  • Seite 386

    20060301 Controlling the Number of Displa yed List Columns You can use the following procedures to control how many list columns appear on the Statistics application window. You can select 2, 3, or 4 columns. u T o specify the number of columns f or the list display On the Stat Editor window, tap S (two columns), D (three columns) or F (four column[...]

  • Seite 387

    20060301 7-3 Before T r ying to Draw a Statistical Graph Before drawing a statistical graph, you need to first configure its “StatGraph setup” using the [SetGraph] menu. The StatGraph setup allows you to configure parameters to control the graph type, the lists that contain a graph’s data, the type of plot markers to be used, and other set[...]

  • Seite 388

    20060301 Configuring StatGraph Setups Use the procedure below to display the Set StatGraphs dialog box and configure the nine StatGraph setups. u T o display the Set StatGraphs dialog bo x (1) On the Stat Editor window, tap [SetGraph] and then [Setting…]. • This displays the Set StatGraphs dialog box. 7-3-2 Before T rying to Draw a Statistica[...]

  • Seite 389

    20060301 7-3-3 Before T rying to Draw a Statistical Graph u Draw Draw the graph using the StatGraph setup of the current tab Not draw the graph using the StatGraph setup of the current tab On Off Select this option: T o do this: u T ype Tap the down arrow button, and then select the graph type from the list that appears. Scatter plot Scatter xy lin[...]

  • Seite 390

    20060301 7-3-4 Before T rying to Draw a Statistical Graph • The initial default frequency setting is 1. Specifying a list that causes each data value to be plotted five times helps to improve the appearance of scatter plots. • A list of frequency values can contain non-zero integers and decimal values. In the case of a MedBox, or MedMed graph,[...]

  • Seite 391

    20060301 7-4 Graphing Single-V ariable Statistical Data Single-variable data is data that consists of a single value. If you are trying to obtain the average height of the members of a single class, for example, the single variable would be height. Single-variable statistics include distributions and sums. You can produce any of the graphs describe[...]

  • Seite 392

    20060301 7-4-2 Graphing Single-V ariable Statistical Data Med-Bo x Plot (MedBox) This type of graph is often called a “Box and Whisker” graph. It lets you see how a large number of data items are grouped within specific ranges. minX Q1 Med Q3 maxX minX minimum Description Label Meaning The data’s smallest value Q1 First Quartile The median b[...]

  • Seite 393

    20060301 7-4-3 Graphing Single-V ariable Statistical Data k Graph P arameter Settings (page 7-3-3, 7-3-4) • [XList] specifies the list that contains the data to be plotted. • [Freq] specifies the frequency of the data. • If [Show Outliers] box is checked, “outlier” square symbols are shown instead of “whisker” lines where a data val[...]

  • Seite 394

    20060301 7-4-4 Graphing Single-V ariable Statistical Data A dialog box like the one shown above appears before the graph is drawn. You can use this dialog box to change th e start value (HStart) and step value (HStep) of the histogram, if you want. Broken Line Graph (Br oken) In the broken line graph, lines connect the pointers that fall at the cen[...]

  • Seite 395

    20060301 7-5 Graphing P aired-V ariable Statistical Data With paired-variable statistical data there are two values for each data item. An example of paired-variable statistical data would be the change in size of an iron bar as its temperature changes. One variable would be temperature, and the other variable is the corresponding bar size. Your Cl[...]

  • Seite 396

    20060301 (9) Tap y to draw the xy line graph. 7-5-2 Graphing P aired-V ariable Statistical Data Drawing a Regression Graph Use the procedures below to input paired-variable statistical data. Next perform regression using the data and then graph the results. Note that you can draw a regression graph without performing the regression calculation. Exa[...]

  • Seite 397

    20060301 7-5-3 Graphing P aired-V ariable Statistical Data (6) Tap [Calc] [Logarithmic Reg]. (7) Tap [OK]. (8) Tap [OK] " . Tip • You can perform trace (page 3-7-1) on a regression graph. Trace scroll, however, is not supported when a scatter diagram is displayed.[...]

  • Seite 398

    20060301 Example 2: Input the paired-variable data shown below (which is the same data as Example 1), and then draw the regression graph without performing regression calculation. list1 = 0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2 list2 = –2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4 u ClassPad Operation (1) m I (2) Input the data shown above. (3) Tap [SetGraph] and then [Setting…], [...]

  • Seite 399

    20060301 Drawing a Linear Regression Graph Linear regression uses the method of least squares to determine the equation that best fits your data points, and returns values for the slope and y -intercept. The graphic representation of this relationship is a linear regression graph. u ClassPad Operation Start the graphing operation from the Statisti[...]

  • Seite 400

    20060301 Drawing a Med-Med Graph When you suspect that the data contains extreme values, you should use the Med-Med graph (which is based on medians) in place of the linear regression graph. Med-Med graph is similar to the linear regression graph, but it also minimizes the effects of extreme values. u ClassPad Operation Start the graphing operation[...]

  • Seite 401

    20060301 Drawing Quadratic, Cubic, and Quartic Regression Graphs You can draw a quadratic, cubic, or quartic regression graph based on the plotted points. These graphs use the method of least squares to draw a curve that passes the vicinity of as many data points as possible. These graphs can be expressed as quadratic, cubic, and quartic regression[...]

  • Seite 402

    20060301 Cubic Regression Model Formula: y = a · x 3 + b · x 2 + c · x + d a : cubic regression coefficient b : quadratic regression coefficient c : linear regression coefficient d : regression constant term ( y -intercept) r 2 : coefficient of determination MSe : mean square error Quartic Regression Model Formula: y = a · x 4 + b · x 3 + [...]

  • Seite 403

    20060301 Drawing a Logarithmic Regression Graph Logarithmic regression expresses y as a logarithmic function of x . The normal logarithmic regression formula is y = a + b · ln( x ). If we say that X = ln( x ), then this formula corresponds to the linear regression formula y = a + b ·X. u ClassPad Operation Start the graphing operation from the St[...]

  • Seite 404

    20060301 Drawing an Exponential Regression Graph ( y = a · e b · x ) Exponential regression can be used when y is proportional to the exponential function of x . The normal exponential regression formula is y = a · e b · x . If we obtain the logarithms of both sides, we get ln( y ) = ln( a ) + b · x . Next, if we say that Y = ln( y ) and A = I[...]

  • Seite 405

    20060301 Drawing an Exponential Regression Graph ( y = a · b x ) Exponential regression can be used when y is proportional to the exponential function of x . The normal exponential regression formula in this case is y = a · b x . If we take the natural logarithms of both sides, we get ln( y ) = ln( a ) + (ln( b )) · x . Next, if we say that Y = [...]

  • Seite 406

    20060301 Drawing a P ower Regression Graph ( y = a · x b ) Power regression can be used when y is proportional to the power of x . The normal power regression formula is y = a · x b . If we obtain the logarithms of both sides, we get ln( y ) = ln( a ) + b · ln( x ). Next, if we say that X = ln( x ), Y = ln( y ), and A = ln( a ), the formula corr[...]

  • Seite 407

    20060301 The following is the sinusoidal regression model formula. y = a ·sin( b · x + c ) + d Tip • Make sure that “Radian” is selected for the [Angle] setting on the Basic Format dialog box (page 1-9-4) before drawing a sinusoidal regression graph. The graph cannot be drawn correctly when the [Angle] setting is “Degree”. • Certain t[...]

  • Seite 408

    20060301 Drawing a Logistic Regression Graph ( ) Logistic regression is best for data whose values continually increase over time, until a saturation point is reached. u ClassPad Operation Start the graphing operation from the Statistics application’s Graph window or List window. From the Graph windo w Tap [Calc] [Logistic Reg] [OK] [OK] " .[...]

  • Seite 409

    20060301 Overlaying a Function Graph on a Statistical Graph You can overlay an existing statistical graph with any type of function graph. Example: Input the two sets of data shown below, and plot the data on a scatter plot. Next, overlay the scatter plot with the graph of y = 2 · ln( x ). list1 = 0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2 list2 = –2.1, 0.3, 1.5, [...]

  • Seite 410

    20060301 7-6 Using the Statistical Graph Windo w T oolbar The following describes the operations you can perform using the toolbar on the Statistical Graph window. 7-6-1 Using the Statistical Graph Window T oolbar Display the Stat Editor window ( Display the Graph Editor window ! Redraw the displayed graph " Display the View Window dialog box [...]

  • Seite 411

    20060301 7-7 P erforming Statistical Calculations You can perform statistical calculations without drawing a graph by tapping [Calc] on the menu bar and selecting [One-Variable] or [Two-Variable]. Viewing Single-v ariable Statistical Calculation Results Besides using a graph, you can also use the following procedure to view the single-variable stat[...]

  • Seite 412

    20060301 Viewing P aired-variab le Statistical Calculation Results Besides using a graph, you can also use the following procedure to view the paired-variable statistics parameter values. u T o display paired-v ariable calculation results (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Two-Variable]. (2) On the dialog box that appears, specify the [XList[...]

  • Seite 413

    20060301 Viewing Regression Calculation Results To view regression calculation results, tap [Calc] on the menu bar and then tap the type of calculation results you want. 7-7-3 P erforming Statistical Calculations • You can also use the [DispStat] option to display the last calculated statistical results. For details about regression calculation r[...]

  • Seite 414

    20060301 u T o view “residual” system v ariable values 7-7-4 P erforming Statistical Calculations (1) Tap here. (2) Tap here, and enter “residual”. • To input lower-case alpha characters, tap the soft keyboard’s 0 tab. (3) Tap w . Copying a Regression Form ula to the Graph & T ab le Application You can use the following procedure to[...]

  • Seite 415

    20060301 7-8 T est, Confidence Interval, and Distribution Calculations You can use a wizard to perform test, confidence interval and distribution calculations in the Statistics application or write a program in the Program application. In the Statistics application, you can perform the calculations using the wizard that you launch by tapping [Cal[...]

  • Seite 416

    20060301 7-8-2 T est, Confidence Interval, and Distribution Calculations k Example 1: 1-Sample Z T est μ condition : ≠ μ 0 : 0 σ : 3 o : 24.5  n : 48 u ClassPad Operation (1)  m p (2) Tap O . (3) On the New File dialog box that appears, configure the settings as described below. Type: Program(Normal) Folder: Select the name of th[...]

  • Seite 417

    20060301 7-8-3 T est, Confidence Interval, and Distribution Calculations Time A1 113, 116 Temperature B1 139, 132 Time A2 133, 131 126, 122 Temperature B2 k Example 2: T wo-W ay ANO V A The values in the table below are measurement results that show how the durability of a metal product is affected by changes in heat treatment time (A) and temp[...]

  • Seite 418

    20060301 7-8-4 T est, Confidence Interval, and Distribution Calculations The above results indicate that altering the time is not significant, altering the temperature is significant, and interaction between time and temperature is highly significant. (10) Tap p .[...]

  • Seite 419

    20060301 7-9-1 T ests 7-9 T ests The following is a list of tests, and a description of what each one tests for. Z Test Description T est Name The Z Test provides a variety of different tests based on standard deviation based tests. They make it possible to test whether or not a sample accurately represents the population when the standard deviatio[...]

  • Seite 420

    20060301 The following pages explain how to perform various statistical calculations based on the above principles. Further details about statistical theory and terminology can be found in any standard statistics textbook. Tip • Always make sure you insert one space between a command and its parameters. In the following examples, spaces are indic[...]

  • Seite 421

    20060301 7-9-3 T ests Calculation Result Output μ ≠ 0 : test condition z : z value p : p -value o : sample mean x σ n –1 : sample standard deviation (Displayed only for list format.) n : sample size Example Mean : 131 Sample size : 10 Population standard deviation : 19 Assumed population mean : 120 • Statistics Wizar d Operation (1) On the [...]

  • Seite 422

    20060301 2-Sample Z T est Menu: [Test]-[Two-Sample ZTest] [Test]-[Two-Sample ZTest] Description: Tests a hypothesis relative to the population mean of two populations when the standard deviations of the two populations are known. A 2-Sample Z Test is used for normal distributions. Z = o 1 — o 2 n 1 1 2 n 2 2 2 + o 1  : sample mean of sample 1 [...]

  • Seite 423

    20060301 Example Sample A Sample B Size 40 45 Standard deviation 23.16 18.51 Mean 65.43 71.87 • Statistics Wizar d Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Test]. (2) Select [Two-Sample ZTest] and [Variable], and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Select the μ 1 condition [ ≠ ] and input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. (5) To display th[...]

  • Seite 424

    20060301 7-9-6 T ests Definition of T erms Prop condition : sample proportion test condition (“ ≠ ” specifies two-tail test, “<” specifies lower one-tail test, “>” specifies upper one-tail test.) p 0 : expected sample proportion (0 < p 0 < 1) x : sample value (integer, x > 0) n : sample size (positive integer) Calcu[...]

  • Seite 425

    20060301 Definition of T erms p 1 condition : sample proportion test conditions (“ ≠ ” specifies two-tail test, “<” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is smaller than sample 2, “>” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is greater than sample 2.) x 1 : data value (integer, x 1 > 0) of sample 1 n 1 : size of sample 1 ([...]

  • Seite 426

    20060301 k t T est 1-Sample t T est Menu: [Test]-[One-Sample TTest] [Test]-[One-Sample TTest] Description: Tests a hypothesis relative to a population mean when population standard deviation is unknown. A 1-Sample t Test is used for t distribution. t = o — 0 x n —1 n o : sample mean μ 0 : assumed population mean x σ n − 1 : sample standard [...]

  • Seite 427

    20060301 (7) To display the graph, tap $ . Example 2 (calculation with parameter) Standard deviation : 80.6 Mean : 295.6 Sample size : 9 Assumed population mean : 250 • Statistics Wizar d Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Test]. (2) Select [One-Sample TTest] and [Variable], and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Select the μ conditi[...]

  • Seite 428

    20060301 2-Sample t T est Menu: [Test]-[Two-Sample TTest] [Test]-[Two-Sample TTest] Description: This command compares the population means of two populations when population standard deviation is unknown. A 2-Sample t Test is used for t distribution. t = o 1 — o 2 x 1 n 2 n 1 + x 2 n 2 n 2 o 1 : sample mean of sample 1 data o 2 : sample mean of [...]

  • Seite 429

    20060301 7-9-11 T ests Calculation Result Output μ 1 ≠ μ 2 : test condition t : t value p : p -value df : degrees of freedom o 1 : sample mean of sample 1 data o 2 : sample mean of sample 2 data x 1 σ n –1 : sample standard deviation of sample 1 x 2 σ n –1 : sample standard deviation of sample 2 x p σ n –1 : Pooled sample standard devi[...]

  • Seite 430

    20060301 Input Example: Syntax 1 (list format) TwoSampleTTest “<”,list1,list2,1,1,Off Syntax 2 (parameter format) TwoSampleTTest “ ≠ ”,107.5,0.78,10,97.5,0.65,12,Off Linear Regression t T est Menu: [Test]-[Linear Reg TTest] Description: This command treats two groups of data as paired variables ( x , y ). The method of least squares is[...]

  • Seite 431

    20060301 7-9-13 T ests Example list1 : { 38, 56, 59, 64, 74 } list2 : { 41, 63, 70, 72, 84 } • Statistics Wizar d Operation (1) Input the data into [list1] and [list2] in the Stat Editor. (2) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Test]. (3) Select [Linear Reg TTest] and then tap [Next >>]. (4) Select the β & ρ condition [ ≠ ]. (5) S[...]

  • Seite 432

    20060301 F = x 1 n –1 2 σ x 2 n –1 2 σ 7-9-14 T ests Calculation Result Output χ 2 :  χ 2 value p : p -value df : degrees of freedom Example a = 11 68 3 9 23 5 • Statistics Wizar d Operation (1) J (2) Input the matrix and assign it to variable a . (3) m I (4) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Test]. (5) Select [ χ 2 Test] and then[...]

  • Seite 433

    20060301 7-9-15 T ests Definition of T erms σ 1 condition: population standard deviation test conditions (“ ≠ ” specifies two- tail test, “<” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is smaller than sample 2, “>” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is greater than sample 2.) List(1) : list where sample 1 data is located Li[...]

  • Seite 434

    20060301 7-9-16 T ests Input Example Syntax 1 (list format) TwoSampleFTest “ ≠ ”,list1,list2,1,1 Syntax 2 (parameter format) TwoSampleFTest “ ≠ ”,1.94,10,2.12,15 k ANO V A One-W ay ANO V A Menu: [Test]-[One-Way ANOVA ] Description: This command tests the hypothesis that the population means of multiple populations are equal. It compares[...]

  • Seite 435

    20060301 7-9-17 T ests u Program, eActivity or Main Application Command: OneWayANOVA  Command Syntax FactorList(A), DependentList Input Example list1:{1,1,1,1,1,2,2,2,2,2,3,3,3,3,3} list2:{7,4,6,6,5,6,5,5,8,7,4,7,6,7,6} OneWayANOVA list1,list2 T wo-W ay ANO V A Menu: [Test]-[Two-Way ANOVA ] Description: This command tests the hypothesis that the[...]

  • Seite 436

    20060301 7-9-18 T ests Example Factor B1 Factor B2 Factor A1 14.5, 11, 10.8, 14.3, 10 (list1) 16.5, 18.4, 12.7, 14, 12.8 (list2) Factor A2 21, 18.5, 15.2, 17.9, 21.6 (list3) 43.2, 35.2, 28.7, 41.3, 47.1 (list4) • Statistics Wizar d Operation (1) Input the data into [list1] through [list4] in the Stat Editor. (2) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and th[...]

  • Seite 437

    20060301 7-10-1 Confidence Intervals 7-10 Confidence Intervals A confidence interval is a range of values that has a specified probability of containing the parameter being estimated. A confidence interval that is too broad makes it difficult to get an idea of where the parameter (actual value) is located. A narrow confidence interval, on th[...]

  • Seite 438

    20060301 Confidence Interval Command List k Z Confidence Interval 1-Sample Z Interval Menu: [Interval]-[One-Sample ZInt] [Interval]-[One-Sample ZInt] One-Sample ZInt] -Sample ZInt] Sample ZInt] ZInt] ZInt] ] Description: This command obtains the confidence interval for the population mean when the population standard deviation is known. The con?[...]

  • Seite 439

    20060301 Example 2 (calculation with parameter) Mean : 300 Sample size : 6 Population standard deviation : 3 Significance level : 5% ( = confidence level : 95%) • Statistics Wizar d Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Interval]. (2) Select [One-Sample ZInt] and [Variable], and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [...]

  • Seite 440

    20060301 Definition of T erms C-Level : confidence level (0 < C-Level < 1) σ 1 : population standard deviation of sample 1 ( σ 1 > 0) σ 2 : population standard deviation of sample 2 ( σ 2 > 0) List(1) : list where sample 1 data is located List(2) : list where sample 2 data is located Freq(1) : frequency of sample 1 (1 or list name[...]

  • Seite 441

    20060301 Input Example: Syntax 1 (list format) TwoSampleZInt 0.95,15.5,13.5,list1,list2,1,1 Syntax 2 (parameter format) TwoSampleZInt 0.95,1,1.5,418,40,402,50 1-Prop Z Interv al Menu: [Interval]-[One-Prop ZInt] Description: This command obtains the confidence interval of the proportion of successes in a population. The confidence interval is obta[...]

  • Seite 442

    20060301 7-10-6 Confidence Intervals u Program, eActivity or Main Application Command: OnePropZ Int  Command Syntax C-Level value, x value, n value Input Example: OnePropZInt 0.99,2048,4040 2-Prop Z Interv al Menu: [Interval]-[Two-Prop ZInt] Description: This command obtains the confidence interval of the difference between the proportions of [...]

  • Seite 443

    20060301 Example Data1 : 49, sample size : 61 Data2 : 38, sample size : 62 Significance level : 5% ( = confidence level : 95%) • Statistics Wizar d Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Interval]. (2) Select [Two-Prop ZInt] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. u Program, eActivity or Main Applic[...]

  • Seite 444

    20060301 Calculation Result Output Left : interval lower limit (left edge) Right : interval upper limit (right edge) o : sample mean x σ n –1 : sample standard deviation n : sample size Example list1 : { 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9 } Significance level : 5% ( = confidence level : 95%) • Statistics Wizar d Operation (1) Input the data into [list1] in [...]

  • Seite 445

    20060301 When the two population standard deviations are equal (pooled) When the two population standard deviations are not equal (not pooled) Definition of T erms C-Level : confidence level (0 < C-Level < 1) List(1) : list where sample 1 data is located List(2) : list where sample 2 data is located Freq(1) : frequency of sample 1 (1 or lis[...]

  • Seite 446

    20060301 Example list1 : { 12.207, 16.869, 25.05, 22,429, 8.456, 10.589 } list2 : { 11.074, 9.686, 12.064, 9.351, 8.182, 6.642 } Significance level : 5% ( = confidence level : 95%) • Statistics Wizar d Operation (1) Input the data into [list1] and [list2] in the Stat Editor. (2) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Interval]. (3) Select [Two-S[...]

  • Seite 447

    20060301 7-11-1 Distributions 7-11 Distrib utions Though there are a number of different types of distributions, the one most commonly used is the “Normal Distribution”, which is an essential type of distribution for statistical calculations. Other types of distributions include the Poisson distribution and geometric distribution. The type of d[...]

  • Seite 448

    20060301 7-11-2 Distributions Description Distribution Name Calculates the probability in a binomial distribution that the success will occur on a specified trial. Calculates the cumulative probability in a binomial distribution that the success will occur on or before a specified trial. Calculates the minimum number of trials of a binomial cumulat[...]

  • Seite 449

    20060301 Distribution Command List k Normal Distribution Normal Probability Density Menu: [Distribution]-[Normal PD] [Distribution]-[Normal PD] Normal PD] ] Description: This command calculates the probability density of normal distribution from a specified x value. Normal probability density is used for normal distribution. ( σ > 0) Definiti[...]

  • Seite 450

    20060301 7-11-4 Distributions Normal Cumulative Distrib ution Menu: [Distribution]-[Normal CD] Description: This command calculates the probability of normal distribution data falling between a and b . dx a : lower bound (Lower) b : upper bound (Upper) Defi nition of T erms Lower : lower bound Upper : upper bound σ : population standard deviation[...]

  • Seite 451

    20060301 7-11-5 Distributions In verse Normal Cumulative Distrib ution Menu: [Distribution]-[Inverse Normal CD] Description: This command calculates the cumulative probability in a normal distribution based on lower and upper bounds. Specify a probability and then use the above formulas to obtain the applicable integration interval. Defi nition of[...]

  • Seite 452

    20060301 7-11-6 Distributions k t Distribution Student- t Probability Density Menu: [Distribution]-[Student-T PD] Description: This command calculates t probability density from a specified x value. f ( x ) = Γ Γ . df π – df + 1 2 2 df 2 df + 1 df x 2 1+ Definition of T erms x : data value df : degrees of freedom ( df > 0) Calculation Res[...]

  • Seite 453

    20060301 Student- t Cumulative Distrib ution Menu: [Distribution]-[Student-T CD] Description: This command calculates the probability of the Student- t distribution data falling between a and b . p = Γ Γ . df π 2 df 2 df + 1 – df +1 2 df x 2 1+ dx a b a : lower bound (Lower) b : upper bound (Upper) Defi nition of T erms Lower : lower bound Up[...]

  • Seite 454

    20060301 7-11-8 Distributions In verse Student- t Cumulative Distrib ution Menu: [Distribution]-[Inverse T CD] Description: This command calculates the inverse of the t cumulative distribution. Lower bound of integration α =? Defi nition of T erms pr ob : t cumulative probability ( p , 0 < p < 1) df : degrees of freedom ( df > 0) Calcula[...]

  • Seite 455

    20060301 7-11-9 Distributions k χ 2 Distribution χ 2 Probability Density Menu: [Distribution]-[ χ 2 PD] Description: This command calculates the probability density of χ 2 distribution from a specified x value. f ( x ) = Γ 1 2 df df 2 x e 2 1 df 2 –1 x 2 – Definition of T erms x : data value df : degrees of freedom (positive integer) Cal[...]

  • Seite 456

    20060301 χ 2 Cumulative Distrib ution Menu: [Distribution]-[ χ 2 CD ] Description: This command calculates the probability of χ 2 distribution data falling between a and b . p = Γ 1 2 df df 2 x e dx 2 1 df 2 –1 x 2 – a b a : lower bound (Lower) b : upper bound (Upper) Defi nition of T erms Lower : lower bound Upper : upper bound df : degre[...]

  • Seite 457

    20060301 Definition of T erms pr ob : χ 2 cumulative probability ( p , 0 < p < 1) df : degrees of freedom (positive integer) Calculation Result Output x Inv : inverse χ 2 cumulative distribution Example Probability : 0.6092146 Degrees of freedom : 4 • Statistics Wizar d Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. ([...]

  • Seite 458

    20060301 Example Data : 1.5 Degrees of freedom of numerator : 24 Degrees of freedom of denominator : 19 • Statistics Wizar d Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [F PD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. (5) To display the graph, tap $ . u Program, eActivity or Main Ap[...]

  • Seite 459

    20060301 Example Lower bound : 1.5 (upper bound : ∞ ) Degrees of freedom of numerator : 24 Degrees of freedom of denominator : 19 • Statistics Wizar d Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [F CD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. (5) To display the graph, tap $ . u P[...]

  • Seite 460

    20060301 Example Probability : 0.1852 Degrees of freedom of numerator : 24 Degrees of freedom of denominator : 19 • Statistics Wizar d Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Inverse F CD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. u Program, eActivity or Main Application Comman[...]

  • Seite 461

    20060301 Example Trials : 5 Specifi ed trial : 3 Probability of success : 0.63 • Statistics Wizar d Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Binomial PD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. (5) To display the graph, tap $ . u Program, eActivity or Main Application Command[...]

  • Seite 462

    20060301 Example Trials : 5 Specified trial : 3 Probability of success : 0.63 • Statistics Wizar d Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Binomial CD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. (5) To display the graph, tap $ . u Program, eActivity or Main Application Command:[...]

  • Seite 463

    20060301 Example Binomial cumulative probability : 0.61 Trials : 5 Probability of success : 0.63 • Statistics Wizar d Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Inverse Binomial CD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. u Program, eActivity or Main Application Command: InvBino[...]

  • Seite 464

    20060301 Example Specifi ed trial : 10 Mean : 6 • Statistics Wizar d Operation (1) On the menu bar, tap [Calc] and then [Distribution]. (2) Select [Poisson PD] and then tap [Next >>]. (3) Input values. (4) Tap [Next >>]. (5) To display the graph, tap $ . u Program, eActivity or Main Application Command: PoissonPD 䡺 Command Syntax x[...]

  • Seite 465

    20060301 u Program, eActivity or Main Application Command: PoissonCD  Command Syntax x value, μ value Input Example: PoissonCD 3,2.26 In verse P oisson Cumulative Distribution Menu: [Distribution]-[Inverse Poisson CD] Description: This command calculates the inverse of the Poisson cumulative distribution. Minimum value of the upper bound of sum[...]

  • Seite 466

    20060301 u Program, eActivity or Main Application Command: InvPoissonCD  Command Syntax pr ob value, μ value Input Example: InvPoissonCD 0.8074,2.26 k Geometric Distribution Geometric Distribution Pr obability Menu: [Distribution]-[Geometric PD] [Distribution]-[Geometric PD] PD] ] Description: This command calculates the probability that a rand[...]

  • Seite 467

    20060301 Geometric Cumulative Distrib ution Menu: [Distribution]-[Geometric CD] Description: This command calculates the probability that a random variable that follows a geometric distribution will be a given x value or less. Defi nition of T erms x : specifi ed trial (positive integer) pos : probability of success p (0 < p < 1) Calculatio[...]

  • Seite 468

    20060301 In verse Geometric Cumulative Distrib ution Menu: [Distribution]-[Inverse Geo CD] Description: This command calculates the inverse of the geometric cumulative distribution. Minimum value of the upper bound of summation which satisfies the inequality m =? (positive integer) Definition of T erms pr ob : geometric cumulative probability (0 [...]

  • Seite 469

    20060301 7-12-1 Statistical System V ariables 7-12 Statistical System V ariables Performing a statistical calculation, graphing operation, or other operation causes calculation results to be assigned to pre-arranged system variables. For more information, see the “System Variable Table” on page α -7-1.[...]

  • Seite 470

    20060301 Using the Geometry Application The Geometry application allows you to draw and analyze geometric figures. You can draw a triangle and specify values to change the size of its sides so they are 3:4:5, and then check the measurement of each of its angles. Or you can draw a circle and then draw a line that is tangent to a particular point on[...]

  • Seite 471

    20060301 8-1-1 Geometry Application Over view 8-1 Geometry Application Over view The Geometry application provides you with the following capabilities. • The [Draw] menu provides command s for drawing points, lines, polygons, regular polygons, circles, ellipses, and other geometric figures. You can also draw functions. Once drawn, a figure can [...]

  • Seite 472

    20060301 • Tapping the toolbar’s right arrow button displays a measurement box. The measurement box displays information for the items that are selected on the window. For example, you can view the coordinates of a point, the length and slope of a line segment, the size of an angle, etc. You can also use the measurement box to change measuremen[...]

  • Seite 473

    20060301 Geometry Application Menus and Buttons This section describes the configuration of the Geometry application windows and provides basic information about its menus and commands. Tip • O menu items are the same for all applications. For more information, see “ Using the O Menu” on page 1-5-4. • The View Window ( O - [View Window]) a[...]

  • Seite 474

    20060301 8-1-4 Geometry Application Over view k Edit Menu Undo or redo the last operation Undo/Redo Clear all settings fixed with the measurement box Clear Constraints Show hidden objects Show All Toggle polygon shading on and off Shade On/Off Hide the currently selected object Properties - Hide Show hidden names Properties - Show Name Hide the sel[...]

  • Seite 475

    20060301 8-1-5 Geometry Application Over view k View Menu T o do this: T ap this button: Or select this View menu item: Zoom Box T Q Activate the pan function for dragging the Graph window with the stylus Pan W Enlarge the display image Zoom In E Reduce the size of the display image Zoom Out R Adjust the size of the display image so it fills the di[...]

  • Seite 476

    20060301 k T oolbar Button The operation described below is available from the toolbar only. 8-1-6 Geometry Application Over view Activate Toggle Select (page 8-3-2) Tap i and then tap a figure. Do this: T o do this: Tapping a button highlights it, indicating that the button’s function is turned on. k About the Measurement Bo x Tapping the u butt[...]

  • Seite 477

    20060301 8-2-1 Drawing Figures [Draw] menu commands T oolbar 8-2 Drawing Figures This section explains how to use the Geometry application to draw various types of figures. It also explains how to use the geometric construction tools to investigate theorems and properties in Geometry. Using the Draw Menu The [Draw] menu makes it easy to draw a var[...]

  • Seite 478

    20060301 u T o draw a line segment using the menu command (1) Tap [Draw] and then [Line Segment]. • This highlights the line segment button on the toolbar. (2) Tap the screen where you want the line segment to begin, and a point will be drawn, and then tap the point where you want it to end. 8-2-2 Drawing Figures Tip • Use [Edit] - [Clear All] [...]

  • Seite 479

    20060301 u T o draw a line segment using the toolbar (1) Tap the second down arrow on the toolbar. This opens the [Draw] menu’s icon palette. (2) Tap the line segment button on the toolbar to highlight it. (3) Tap the screen where you want the line segment to begin. This plots a point. (4) Tap the beginning point again and, without lifting the st[...]

  • Seite 480

    20060301 u T o add a labeled point to an existing line You can use the following procedure to add a labeled point to an existing line, to a side of an n-gon, to the periphery of a circle or ellipse, etc. (1) Tap [Draw] and then [Point]. • This highlights the point button on the toolbar. (2) Drag the stylus on the screen towards the line where [...]

  • Seite 481

    20060301 8-2-5 Drawing Figures u T o draw a ra y Example: To draw a ray and then determine its y = f ( x ) linear equation by dropping the ray into the Main or eActivity application window (1) Tap [Draw] and then [Ray]. • This highlights the ray button on the toolbar. (2) Tap two points on the screen. • You could also tap one point and then dra[...]

  • Seite 482

    20060301 u T o draw a vector (1) Tap [Draw] and then [Vector]. • This highlights the vector button on the toolbar. (2) Tap the point where you want the vector to start, and then its end point. • You could also tap one point, and then drag to the vector end point. 8-2-6 Drawing Figures u T o draw a cir cle (1) Tap [Draw] and then [Circle]. • T[...]

  • Seite 483

    20060301 8-2-7 Drawing Figures u T o draw a function Example: To draw y ( x ) = x 2 – 1 (1) Tap [Draw], [Function], and then [f( x )]. • This causes the Function dialog box and a soft keyboard to appear. (2) Input the function. (3) Tap [OK] to draw it.[...]

  • Seite 484

    20060301 (1) Tap [Draw], [Function], and then [Polar]. • This displays the Function dialog box and a soft keyboard as shown here. 8-2-8 Drawing Figures u T o draw a polar equation graph Note In this example the [Function Angle] setting of the Geometry Format dialog box is set to “Radian”. See page 1-9-10 for more information. (2) Input the eq[...]

  • Seite 485

    20060301 Tip • You can drag a polar curve from the Geometry window and drop it into a Main or eActivity window. Or, for example, you can drag the equation r = f ( θ ) from the Main or eActivity window and drop it into the Geometry window as shown below. u T o draw a parametric equation graph 8-2-9 Drawing Figures Note In this example the [Functi[...]

  • Seite 486

    20060301 Tip • You can display equations such as ( x ( t ), y ( t )) on the Geometry window by dragging the equation and dropping it into the Main or eActivity window. When you do, however, the equation appears as text (it does not graph the equation). 8-2-10 Drawing Figures (2) Input the following expressions and values: x t = cos(t), y t = sin([...]

  • Seite 487

    20060301 u T o draw an ellipse using the [Ellipse] - [Axes] command Note When you draw an ellipse using the [Ellipse] - [Axes] command, you need to specify the following three elements: center point, Point 1 and Point 2. Point 1 defines the minor axis (nearest point on the edge from the center point) and Point 2 defines the major axis (farthest p[...]

  • Seite 488

    20060301 u T o draw an ellipse using the [Ellipse] - [Foci] command Note An ellipse is the locus of points, the sum of whose distances from two fixed points (called foci ) is a constant. An ellipse drawn using the [Ellipse] - [Foci] command is drawn in accordance with this definition. When you draw an ellipse with the [Foci] command, you need to [...]

  • Seite 489

    20060301 (3)Tap the point you want to specify as Point 3. • This specifies the point you tap as Point 3 and draws the ellipse. • Instead of tapping the screen to specify Point 3, you could also drag the stylus on the display. As soon as you tap and hold the stylus on the screen, the line connecting Point 1 and Point 2 will bend to show the dis[...]

  • Seite 490

    20060301 u T o draw a h yperbola Note A hyperbola is the locus of points, the difference of whose distances from two fixed points (called foci ) is a given value. A hyperbola drawn using the [Hyperbola] command is drawn in accordance with this definition. When you draw a hyperbola with the [Hyperbola] command, you need to specify three different [...]

  • Seite 491

    20060301 • Instead of tapping the screen to specify Point 3, you could also drag the stylus on the display. As soon as you tap and hold the stylus on the screen, the line connecting Point 1 and Point 2 will bend to show the distance from the foci to the location of the stylus, as shown below. Move the stylus to the location where you want Point 3[...]

  • Seite 492

    20060301 u T o draw a parabola Note A parabola is the locus of points equidistant from a point (the focus) and a line (the directrix). A parabola drawn using the [Parabola] command is drawn in accordance with this definition. When you draw an parabola with the [Parabola] command, you need to specify three different points: a line to define the di[...]

  • Seite 493

    20060301 u T o draw a pol ygon (1) Tap [Draw] and then [Polygon]. • This highlights the polygon button on the toolbar. (2) Tap the point from which you want the polygon to start. (3) Sequentially tap each of the vertices of the polygon. (4) Finally, tap the start point again to complete the polygon. 8-2-17 Drawing Figures[...]

  • Seite 494

    20060301 Inserting T ext Strings into the Screen You can insert text strings into the screen while working on the Geometry application window. u T o insert a text string into a screen (1) Tap [Draw] and [Text]. • This displays the Text dialog box and a soft keyboard. (2) Input the text you want on the dialog box. • You can input alphanumeric ch[...]

  • Seite 495

    20060301 Drag and Dr op Text on the Geometry window can be dragged to the Main or eActivity window. You can also drop text from these application windows into the Geometry window. Attaching an Angle Measurement to a Figure The measurement of an angle formed by two sides of a figure can be attached to the figure as shown here. To do so, tap [Attac[...]

  • Seite 496

    20060301 Tip • The two sides of a figure actually forms four angles, numbered 1 through 4 in the illustration shown here. After attaching an angle measurement using the [Attached Angle] command, you can drag it to the position of any one of the other three angles as shown in the examples below. 4 1 2 3 u T o attach an angle measurement to a fig[...]

  • Seite 497

    20060301 Example: To drag the angle measurement attached to interior angle A of triangle ABC to its exterior complementary angle (Dragging to the complementary angle of the opposite angle of A) (Draggi ng to the op posite angle of A) 8-2-21 Drawing Figures Tip • You can display more than one attached angle. To do this in the above example, first[...]

  • Seite 498

    20060301 8-2-22 Drawing Figures Displaying the Measurements of a Figure You can display measurements on the Geometry application window. The measurements change dynamically as you manipulate the figure. A List of [Measurement] Submenu Commands on the [Draw] Men u Names of Commands Meanings of Each Command Angle Angle between two lines Supplementar[...]

  • Seite 499

    20060301 (3) Tap [Draw], [Measurement], and then [Angle]. • This shows the angle measurement on the screen. Method 2: Selecting the value in the measurement box and dr opping it directly into the Geometry application window (1) Tap G and select elements AB and AC. (2) Tap the u button to the right of the toolbar. • This displays the measurement[...]

  • Seite 500

    20060301 (3) Select (highlight) value in the measurement box and drop it into the screen below. • This displays the specified angle measurement on the screen as shown below. Method 3: T apping the measurement icon button to the left of the measurement box (1) Tap G and select elements AB and AC. (2) Tap the u button to the right of the toolbar. [...]

  • Seite 501

    20060301 Displaying the Result of a Calculation that Uses On-screen Measurement V alues You can use the [Expression] command and the commands on the [Measurement] sub- menu to perform calculations using the angle value, line length, surface area, and other measurement values attached to a figure, and display the result on the Geometry window. u T [...]

  • Seite 502

    20060301 (8) Tap the u button to the right of the toolbar. This will display the measurement box. • The above will also display numeric labels for each measurement currently on the screen. (9) Now you can use the numeric labels to specify measurement values in the calculation you input in the measurement box. • To input a measu rement value in [...]

  • Seite 503

    20060301 Using the Special Shape Submenu The [Special Shape] submenu allows you to draw specially shaped figures automatically. Simply select the type of figure you want from the menu, and then touch the screen with the stylus to draw it. Or, touch the screen with your stylus and drag to create a box indicating the size of the figure you would l[...]

  • Seite 504

    20060301 u T o draw a triangle (1) Tap [Draw], [Special Shape], and then [Triangle]. • This highlights the triangle button on the toolbar. (2) Perform either of the following two operations to draw the triangle. • Tap the screen with the stylus. This automatically draws the acute triangle you selected. • Place the stylus on the screen and dra[...]

  • Seite 505

    20060301 (3) Perform either of the following two operations to draw the regular polygon. • Tap the screen with the stylus. This automatically draws the polygon you selected. • Place the stylus on the screen and drag diagonally in any direction. This causes a selection boundary to appear, indicating the size of the polygon that will be drawn. Th[...]

  • Seite 506

    20060301 Using the Construct Submenu The [Construct] submenu provides you with the means to study various geometric theorems. In addition to tools for constructing a perpendicular bisector, perpendicular line, angle bisector, midpoint, intersection , parallel lines and a tangent to a curve, you can also tr anslate, rotate, reflect, dilate, or tran[...]

  • Seite 507

    20060301 8-2-31 Drawing Figures u T o construct a perpendicular bisector (1) Draw a line segment. (2) Tap G , and then select the line segment. (3) Tap [Draw], [Construct], and then [Perp. Bisector]. • This draws a perpendicular bisector through your line segment. u T o construct an angle bisector (1) Draw two line segments so they form an angle.[...]

  • Seite 508

    20060301 8-2-32 Drawing Figures u T o construct a midpoint (1) Draw a line segment. (2) Tap G , and then select the line segment. (3) Tap [Draw], [Construct], and then [Midpoint]. • This adds a midpoint to the segment. u T o construct the point of intersection of tw o lines (1) Draw two lines that intersect. (2) Tap G , and then select both lines[...]

  • Seite 509

    20060301 8-2-33 Drawing Figures u T o construct a perpendicular line that passes through a specified point on a line (1) Draw a line segment or an infinite line. (2) Draw a point on the line through which you want the perpendicular line to pass. (3) Tap G , and then select the point and the line. (4) Tap [Draw], [Construct], and then [Perpendicul[...]

  • Seite 510

    20060301 8-2-34 Drawing Figures u T o construct a tangent to a curve through a specified point (1) Draw a curve, such as an ellipse. (2) Tap [Draw], [Construct], and then [Tangent to Curve]. • This highlights the tangent to a curve button on the toolbar. (3) Tap the point of tangency on the curve. • This draws the tangent. u T o translate a li[...]

  • Seite 511

    20060301 8-2-35 Drawing Figures (1) Draw a line segment (AB), and a vector to use in the translation. Next, select the line segment. (2) Tap [Draw], [Construct], and then [Translation]. • This displays the Translation dialog box. (3) Tap [Select Vector]. (4) Tap the vector on the screen. • This translates line segment AB in accordance with the [...]

  • Seite 512

    20060301 8-2-36 Drawing Figures u T o reflect a line segment with respect to a specified line of symmetry (1) Draw a line segment. (2) Draw a line to use as the line of symmetry. (3) Tap G , and then select the line segment. (4) Tap [Draw], [Construct], and then [Reflection]. • This highlights the reflection button on the toolbar. (5) Tap the[...]

  • Seite 513

    20060301 8-2-37 Drawing Figures T ransformation Using a Matrix or V ector (General T ransf orm) General Transform lets you input a matrix and/or vector to transform a figure. The result of the transformation is drawn as a separate figure. For example, if you transform line segment AB, the line segment A’B’ will be drawn. You can perform the f[...]

  • Seite 514

    20060301 Tip • All of the steps in the procedure below are performed using the Geometry application only. You can also use the Main application or eActivity application to perform matrix calculations and obtain the same transformation. You can drag a figure from Geometry to Main, which transforms values (matrix) and performs calculation, and dra[...]

  • Seite 515

    20060301 (5) Tap [OK]. • This draws triangle A’B’C’, which is symmetrical to triangle ABC about the x -axis. (6) Tap anywhere outside of the triangles to deselect the currently selected triangle. Next, select triangle A’B’C’. (7) Tap [Draw], [Construct], and then [General Transform]. (8) Now, to perform parallel displacement on triang[...]

  • Seite 516

    20060301 (9) Tap [OK]. • This performs the parallel displacement and draws triangle A’’B’’C’’. Note • In the above example, we performed the transformation and the parallel displacement operations separately. You could also perform both operations at the same time, if you want. To do so, input both the matrix [[1, 0], [0, – 1]] an[...]

  • Seite 517

    20060301 k (a) Operation Example The following procedure assumes that the results produced by the procedure under “General Transform Example” on page 8-2-37 are still on the Geometry application window. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap J to start up the Main application. (2) Tap the right most down arrow button on the Main [...]

  • Seite 518

    20060301 Important! • This operation is valid only when a point in the original figure and the corresponding point in the transformed figure are selected in the Geometry application. Nothing is displayed when you select points A and A’’ in the above procedure and drag them to the Main application work area. Observe this area of the expressi[...]

  • Seite 519

    20060301 (5) Select the triangle and drag it to the cursor location in the Main application work area. • This inputs a matrix that shows the coordinates of the triangle’s three vertices into the work area. 8-2-43 Drawing Figures (6) Here, try multiplying by the matrix [[–1, 0], [0, 1]] to transform the matrix obtained above to a form that is [...]

  • Seite 520

    20060301 8-2-44 Drawing Figures (7) Select the matrix obtained as the calculation result, and drag it to the Geometry window. • This draws a triangle that is symmetrical to the original triangle about the y -axis.[...]

  • Seite 521

    20060301 8-3 Editing Figures This section provides details about moving, copying, and deleting Geometry application figures. Selecting and Deselecting Figures Before you can execute certain editing commands, you must first select the figure you want to edit. There are two figure selection modes: Select and Toggle Select, each of which is descri[...]

  • Seite 522

    20060301 k Using T oggle Select Tap on the toolbar. This causes the button to become highlighted, indicating that Toggle Select is enabled. Toggle Select allows you to select and deselect figures. For example, if you have multiple figures selected, Toggle Select will allow you to deselect a single part of the selection. Tapping the part again wil[...]

  • Seite 523

    20060301 8-3-3 Editing Figures u T o copy a figure (1) Draw a figure, and then select it. (2) Tap [Edit], and then [Copy]. (3) Tap anywhere on the screen to deselect the figure. (4) Tap [Edit], and then [Paste]. (5) Drag the pasted figure to the location you want. Moving and Cop ying Figures It is easy to move figures or copy and paste figure[...]

  • Seite 524

    20060301 Pinning an Annotation on the Geometry Windo w You can pin an annotation on the Geometry window using the Pin function. By default, annotations are ‘Unpinned’, so they pan or zoom along with the Geometry window. Pinning an annotation fixes its position on the screen so it is always displayed in the same location on the Geometry window.[...]

  • Seite 525

    20060301 Specifying the Number Format of a Measurement You can specify the number format for each measurement on the Geometry window. Example: To specify zero decimal places for measurement values on the Geometry window (1) Select (highlight) the measurement(s). (2) Tap the [Edit], [Properties], and then [Number Format]. • This displays the Numbe[...]

  • Seite 526

    20060301 (4) Tap [OK]. • This will display the measurement value(s) you selected in the step 1 using the specified number format. Tip The initial default number format setting for measurement values is “Fix 2”. Using the Measurement Bo x Tapping the u button to the right of the toolbar displays the measurement box. Tap t to return to the nor[...]

  • Seite 527

    20060301 8-3-7 Editing Figures k Viewing the Measurements of a Figure The type of information that appears in the measurement box depends on the figure that is currently select ed on the display. If a line s egment is selected, for exampl e, the measurement box shows the distance, slope, angle from the x -axis, and the equation for that line. You [...]

  • Seite 528

    20060301 8-3-8 Editing Figures Icon Icon Name This icon appears when this is selected: T apping this icon displays: Lockable K e 6 Angle Yes Q t Two line segments Angle and its supplement formed by the line segments Tangency Yes Two circles or arcs, or a line and circle Whether two items are tangent Congruence Yes Two line segments Whether line seg[...]

  • Seite 529

    20060301 8-3-9 Editing Figures (3) Select points A, D, and B. • This causes the area of the triangle ADB to appear in the measurement box. (4) Tap anywhere outside of the parallelogram to deselect the current points, and then select points A, D, and C. • This causes the area of the triangle ADC to appear in the measurement box. The above proced[...]

  • Seite 530

    20060301 8-3-10 Editing Figures (4) Tap the down arrow next to the measurement box to cycle through other measurements. • In the case of the line segment, for example, you can view its length, slope, direction, and equation. k Specifying a Measurement of a Figure The following example shows how to specify an angle of a triangle. u T o specify the[...]

  • Seite 531

    20060301 8-3-11 Editing Figures A highlighted check box indicates the measurement is fixed (constrained). k Fixing a Measurement of a Figure By “fixing a measurement” we mean that a constraint is placed on the figure. For example, if we fix (constrain) a point to a circle and move the circle, the point will also move. The following example [...]

  • Seite 532

    20060301 (2) Input a new name (“Center”) in the measurement box. (3) Tap E or the check box to the right side of measurement box. • This displays the changed name on the screen as shown here. 8-3-12 Editing Figures[...]

  • Seite 533

    20060301 8-4 Contr olling Geometr y Windo w Appearance This section provides information about how to control the appearance of the Geometry application window by scrolling or zooming, and by showing or hiding axes and the grid. Configuring View Window Settings You can use the following procedures to configure settings that control the appearance[...]

  • Seite 534

    20060301 8-4-2 Controlling Geometry Window Appear ance Tip • You can also turn on the Integer Grid by tapping [View] and then [Integer Grid]. See page 8-4-3 for more information. Axes off, values off Axes on, values off Axes on, values on Selecting the Axis Setting Tap q , or tap [Vi ew] and then [Toggle Axes] to cycle through the four setting s [...]

  • Seite 535

    20060301 8-4-3 Controlling Geometry Window Appear ance Zooming The Geometry application provides you with a selection of zoom commands that you can use to enlarge or reduce an entire display image or a specific area of a figure. Tip • The scree nshots in this sectio n all use the “Axes on , values on” setting described under “Sele cting t[...]

  • Seite 536

    20060301 8-4-4 Controlling Geometry Window Appear ance u T o use Zoom In and Out Example 1: To zoom in on a circle (1) Draw a circle. (2) Tap [View] and then [Zoom In], or tap W . • This enlarges the circle. Example 2: To zoom out on a circle (1) Draw a circle. (2) Tap [View] and then [Zoom Out] or tap E . • This reduces the size of the circle.[...]

  • Seite 537

    20060301 8-4-5 Controlling Geometry Window Appear ance Tip • You can also perform the Zoom In, Zoom Out, and Zoom to Fit operations by pressing ClassPad keys as described below. T o do this: Press this key: Zoom In + Zoom Out - Zoom to Fit = u T o use Zoom to Fit (1) Draw the figure or figures you want. • If what you are drawing does not fit[...]

  • Seite 538

    20060301 8-4-6 Controlling Geometry Window Appear ance Using P an to Shift the Display Image Panning makes it easy to shift the display image by dragging with the stylus. Tip • The screenshot in this section uses the “Axes on, values on” setting described under “Selecting the Axis Setting” on page 8-4-2. u T o use P an Example: To pan the[...]

  • Seite 539

    20060301 8-5 W orking with Animations An animation consists of one or more point/curve pairs, in which the curve can be a line segment, circle, ellipse, or function. You build an animation by selecting a point/curve pair, and then adding it to an animation. Using Animation Commands You can build and run an animation either by executing menu command[...]

  • Seite 540

    20060301 u T o add an animation and run it (1) Plot a point and draw an arc. Or, you could draw a circle, ellipse, line segment, or function instead of an arc. (2) Select the point and arc. 8-5-2 Working with Animations (3) Tap [Edit], [Animate], and then [Add Animation]. (4) Tap [Edit], [Animate], and then [Go (once)], [Go (repeat)], or [Go (to an[...]

  • Seite 541

    20060301 u T o animate a point around a cir cle (1) Plot a point and draw a circle, and then select them. 8-5-3 Working with Animations Tip • You can repeat the above procedure to create multiple points that move simultaneously. Try this: • Draw a line segment and plot another point. • Select the line segment and the point. • Repeat steps ([...]

  • Seite 542

    20060301 (3) Tap [Edit], [Animate], and then [Go (once)]. • This causes the point to travel around the circumference of the circle. u T o replace the current animation with a new one (1) Select the point and curve for the new animation. (2) Tap [Edit], [Animate], and then [Replace Animation]. • This discards the currently set animation and sets[...]

  • Seite 543

    20060301 (6) Select line segments AB and DE, enter 90 in the measurement box, and tap the check box next to the measurement box. • This fixes the angle between AB and DE at 90 degrees. 8-5-5 Working with Animations (7) Select only line segments DE and DC, and then tap the down arrow next to the measurement box. (8) Tap the e icon, and then selec[...]

  • Seite 544

    20060301 u T o edit an animation (1) Wh ile th e anim ation you wa nt to edit i s on t he dis play, tap [E dit], [Anima te], a nd the n [Edi t Animations]. • This displays the animation editing window in the lower window. The upper window contains the animation that we just completed in “To trace a locus of points”. See page 8-5-4 for informa[...]

  • Seite 545

    20060301 8-5-7 Working with Animations Measurement box T races This item shows the specified trace point. Tapping [Remove] cancels the trace point setting. (3) While the lower window is active, tap O and then [Close] to close the animation editing window. u T o view an animation table (1) Draw a triangle and a line segment above the triangle. (2) [...]

  • Seite 546

    20060301 8-5-8 Working with Animations (6) With the line and vertex point still selected, tap [Edit], [Animate], and then [Add Animation]. (7) Now, select only one side of the triangle. (8) Tap [Edit], [Animate], and then [Go (once)]. (9) Tap # next to the measurement box. • While the animation is running, the lower window shows the table for the[...]

  • Seite 547

    20060301 8-6 Using the Geometr y Application with Other Applications You can display the Geometry application from within the eActivity or Main application. This is a great feature that allows you to visualize the relationship between Algebra and Geometry. You can, for example, drag a figure from the Geometry window to the eActivity window to see [...]

  • Seite 548

    20060301 (4) Select the circle and drag it to the first available line in the eActivity window. • This inserts the equation of the circle in the eActivity window. (5) You can now experiment with the data in the eActivity window. Tip • Try modifying the radius of the circle in the eActivity window. Highlight your modified equation, then drag i[...]

  • Seite 549

    20060301 Example 2: To drag two sides of a triangle from the Geometry window to the Main window u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap m to display the application menu, and then tap J to start the Main application. (2) Tap 3 to display the Geometry window in the lower half of the screen. Geometry window (3) Draw a triangle on the Geometry window. (4) Select[...]

  • Seite 550

    20060301 (5) Press E . • Notice that the solution is the same as the coordinates of point A. 8-6-4 Using the Geometry Application with Other Applications • To show the coordinates of A, just select point A. Its coordinates will be displayed in the status bar. Tip • Try using this drag and drop method to fi nd the point of intersection of two[...]

  • Seite 551

    20060301 8-6-5 Using the Geometry Application with Other Applications Copy and P aste In addition to drag and drop, you can also copy figures or columns from an animation table, and paste them into another application. Example of dynamically linked data For information on how to create a dynamic link between a geometric figure and its equation in[...]

  • Seite 552

    20060301 8-7 Managing Geometry Application Files This section covers file management operations such as save, open, delete, rename, move, etc. 8-7-1 Managing Geometry Application Files Tip • You can also use the Variable Manager (page 1-8-1) to manage Geometry application files. File Operations u T o save a file (1) Tap [File] and then [Save].[...]

  • Seite 553

    20060301 (3) Enter the file name you want to find and then tap [Search]. • File names that match the one you enter become highlighted on the display. Tapping [Open] opens the highlighted file. • To search for the next occurrence of the file name, tap [Search] again and then tap [Next] on the Search dialog box. u T o open an existing file ([...]

  • Seite 554

    20060301 u T o save a file under a different name (1) Tap [File] and then [Save]. • This displays the Files dialog box. 8-7-3 Managing Geometry Application Files (4) Tap [Save]. u T o delete a file (1) Tap [File] and then [Open]. • This displays the Files dialog box. (2) Select the check box next to the file you want to delete. • You can s[...]

  • Seite 555

    20060301 8-7-4 Managing Geometry Application Files u T o rename a file (1) Tap [File] and then [Open]. • This displays the Files dialog box. (2) Tap the name of the file you want to rename so it is selected. (3) Tap [File] and then [Rename]. • This displays the Rename dialog box. (4) Enter the new file name. (5) In response to the confirmat[...]

  • Seite 556

    20060301 u T o delete a folder W arning! Deleting a folder also deletes all files inside of it. Please double-check to make sure you no longer need the contents of a folder before deleting it. (1) Tap [File] and then [Open]. • This displays the Files dialog box. (2) Select the check box next to the folder you want to delete. • You can select m[...]

  • Seite 557

    20060301 9 Using the Numeric Solver Application This chapter provides information about the functions of the Numeric Solver application, referred to as NumSolve, and explains how to perform Numeric Solver procedures. Numeric Solver lets you obtain the value of any variable in an equation without the need to transform or simplify the equation. 9-1 N[...]

  • Seite 558

    20060301 9-1-1 Numeric Solver Application Ov er view 9-1 Numeric Solver Application Over view This section describes the configuration of the Numeric Solver application windows and provides basic information about Numeric Solver menu and commands. Numeric Solver Application Window Starting up Numeric Solver application displays the window shown be[...]

  • Seite 559

    20060301 k T oolbar The toolbar provides you with easy access to the Main application, 3D Graph Editor, Graph Editor, and, of course, Solve. k Dragging an Expression fr om the Other Application to the Numeric Solver Window You can drag expression and equations from the Main application window or Graph Editor window and drop them into the Nume[...]

  • Seite 560

    20060301 9-2 Using Numeric Solver Numeric Solver lets you obtain the value of any variable in an equation, without the need to transform or simplify the equation. Example: t is the time it would take for an object thrown straight up with initial velocity v to reach height h. Use the formula below to calculate the initial velocity v for a height of [...]

  • Seite 561

    20060301 9-2-2 Using Numeric Solver (6) Tap 1 , or tap [Solve] and then [Execute] on the Numeric Solver menu. • The [Left–Right] value shows the difference between the left side and right side results. Tip • Numeric Solver solves functions by calculating approximations based on Newton’s method. This means that solutions may include errors t[...]

  • Seite 562

    20060301 9-2-3 Using Numeric Solver (6) Tap a then [Convergence]. (7) Enter 10 and then tap [OK]. (8) Tap 1 , or tap [Solve] and then [Execute] on the Numeric Solver menu. • The software is now able to converge to a solution.[...]

  • Seite 563

    20060301 Using the eActivity Application An eActivity is both a documentation tool, and a student notebook. As a documentation tool, a teacher can create electronic examples and practice problems with accompanying text, mathematical expressions, 2D and 3D graphs, geometric drawings, and tables. eActivities provide the student the means to explore p[...]

  • Seite 564

    20060301 10-1-1 eActivity Application Overview 10-1 eActivity Application Overvie w The eActivity application lets you input and edit text, mathematical expressions, and ClassPad application data, and save your input in a file called an “eActivity”. The techniques you will use are similar to those of a standard word processor, and they are eas[...]

  • Seite 565

    20060301 eActivity Application Menus and Buttons This section explains the operations you can perform using the menus and toolbar buttons of the eActivity application. • For information about the O menu, see “Using the O Menu” on page 1-5-4. k File Menu 10-1-2 eActivity Application Overview k Edit Menu New Open Save Select this File menu item[...]

  • Seite 566

    20060301 k Insert Menu k Action Menu 10-1-3 eActivity Application Overview Calculation Row — — — ~ 3 $ ! % @ ^ * y ( 1 & _ Q W Text Row Geometry Link Insert an application data strip Strip - Main Strip - Geometry Strip - Graph Strip - Graph Editor Strip - 3D Graph Strip - 3D Graph Editor Strip - Conics Graph Strip - Conics Editor Strip - [...]

  • Seite 567

    20060301 10-1-4 eActivity Application Overview eActivity Application Status Bar The information that appears in the eActivity application status bar is same as the Main application status bar information. See “Using Main Application Modes” on page 2-1-4. eActivity Ke y Operations In the eActivity application, the cursor key, K key, and E key op[...]

  • Seite 568

    20060301 10-1-5 eActivity Application Overview Tip When the shift operation is assigned to the ClassPad z key, you can select a range of characters with the left and right cursor keys. Simply press the ClassPad z key and then press e or d . Each press of the cursor key will select (highlight) the next character in the applicable direction. Example:[...]

  • Seite 569

    20060301 10-2 Creating an eActivity This provides a general overview of eActivity operations, from starting up the eActivity application to saving an eActivity file. It also presents precautions you need to keep in mind when managing eActivity files. Basic Steps for Creating an eActivity The following are the basic steps you need to perform when [...]

  • Seite 570

    20060301 (3) After the eActivity is the way you want, tap [File] and then [Save]. • This displays the Files dialog box. This is a list of folders and files. Select the name of the folder where you want to save the eActivity file by tapping it. Tap here to create a new folder. Enter up to 20 characters for the eActivity file name. 10-2-2 Creati[...]

  • Seite 571

    20060301 Managing eActivity Files This section covers file management operations like save, open, delete, rename, move, etc. Performing one of these operations displays a Files dialog box like the ones shown below. The buttons that appear in the dialog box depend on the operation you performed to display the Files dialog box. 10-2-3 Creating an eA[...]

  • Seite 572

    20060301 10-3 Inserting Data into an eActivity The following describes the four types of data you can insert into an eActivity. 10-3-1 Inser ting Data into an eActivity Inserting a T ext Ro w Text rows make it possible to display and edit text directly in the eActivity window. Text rows can contain multiple lines, as well as mathematical expression[...]

  • Seite 573

    20060301 Tip • The toolbar button for switching between input modes appears as u while the cursor is located in a text row, and while the cursor is located in a calculation row. 10-3-2 Inser ting Data into an eActivity u T o insert a T ext Row (1) Tap to change a row to the Text Input mode. • If the cursor is located in a line that already cont[...]

  • Seite 574

    20060301 10-3-3 Inser ting Data into an eActivity Important! • You cannot bold numeric expressions of a nat ural display expression that you input with the 2D soft keyboard. Inserting a Calculation Row Calculation rows let you perform calculations in an eActivity. When you input a mathematical expression, the output expression (res ult) appears, [...]

  • Seite 575

    20060301 Tip • The toolbar button for switching between input modes appears as u while the cursor is located in a text row, and while the cursor is located in a calculation row. Line 1: Expression you input Line 2: Result u T o insert a Calculation Row (1) Tap u to change a row from the Text Input mode to the Calculation Input mode. • If the cu[...]

  • Seite 576

    20060301 10-3-5 Inser ting Data into an eActivity Changing “10 S b ” to “20 S b ” in the example below and pressing E causes all of the expressions under “20 S b ” to be re-calculated. • Tap to the right of “10”. • Press K twice, and then input “20”. • Press E . u T o run a program in the eActivity application You can use [...]

  • Seite 577

    20060301 10-3-6 Inser ting Data into an eActivity k Inserting an Application Data Strip into an eActivity Tap the [Insert] menu or the right most toolbar down arrow button, and then select the command or button that corresponds to the type of application data you want to insert. Select this [Insert] menu item: T o insert this type of application da[...]

  • Seite 578

    20060301 Example 1: To insert a Geometry data strip u ClassPad Operation (1) From the eActivity menu, tap [Insert], [Strip], and then [Geometry]. • This inserts a Geometry data strip, and displays the Geometry window in the lower half of the screen. 10-3-7 Inser ting Data into an eActivity (2) On the Geometry window, draw the figure you want. ?[...]

  • Seite 579

    20060301 (4) Tap the title box of the Geometry data strip and enter the title you want. 10-3-8 Inser ting Data into an eActivity • If you want to input more data into the eActivity, tap the next line or use the [Insert] menu to select the type of strip you want to insert next. Example 2: To insert a Graph data strip u ClassPad Operation (1) On th[...]

  • Seite 580

    20060301 (3) After you finish performing the operation you want on the Graph window, tap S , or tap O and then [Close] to close the Graph window. You will also need to tap the Graph Editor window, and then select O then [Close] to return to the eActivity window. (4) Tap the title box of the Graph data strip and enter the title you want. 10-3-9 Ins[...]

  • Seite 581

    20060301 Example 3: To use Notes in an eActivity Notes is a simple text editing tool for taking notes or including in-depth explanations within an eActivity. You can use Notes to store information for later use, or as a place to jot down ideas. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the eActivity window, tap [Insert], [Strip], and then [Notes]. • This inser[...]

  • Seite 582

    20060301 10-3-11 Inser ting Data into an eActivity Tip • You can use the Notes window to enter notes, homework assignments, in-depth details, etc. • All information you enter is treated as text. • When inputting text into a Notes window, the cursor will jump down to the beginning of the next line when the right edge of the current line is rea[...]

  • Seite 583

    20060301 u ClassPad Operation (1) On the eActivity window, tap [Insert], [Strip], and then [Picture]. • This will insert a Picture strip and display the Picture window in the lower half of the display. (2) Tap [File] - [Open]. • This displays the Files dialog box. The Files dialog box displays only data whose data type is PICT. (3) On the Pictu[...]

  • Seite 584

    20060301 (4) Tap [Open]. • This will display the PICT data you selected in the Picture window. • You can use the File menu and toolbar to perform following operations while the Picture window is on the display. T o do this: Select this File menu item: Or tap this button: Open a bitmap (PICT data type) image Open – Save an open bitmap image Sa[...]

  • Seite 585

    20060301 Strip Help T e xt You can add help text to any strip. A strip that has help text is indicated by a button. Tapping a button will display the help window along with the application window. u T o add help text to a strip (1) Tap the title box of the strip to which you want to add help text. (2) Tap [Insert] - [Add Strip Help]. • A help win[...]

  • Seite 586

    20060301 Moving Inf ormation Between eActivity and Applications An eActivity is like an interactive notebook or textbook that allows you to explore the world of mathematics right on the page. You can take almost any expression from an eActivity page and send it to another application. You can also take information from an application and insert it [...]

  • Seite 587

    20060301 10-3-16 Inser ting Data into an eActivity k Drag and Dr op You can drag and drop text or mathematical expressions between eActivity and other applications. You can also drag and drop within an eActivity. Depending on the application, you can drag text and mathematical expressions from an eActivity to another application window. For example[...]

  • Seite 588

    20060301 Inserting a Geometr y Link Row A Geometry Link row dynamically links data in the Geometry window with the corresponding data in an eActivity. You can display lines and figures drawn in Geometry as values and mathematical expressions in a Geometry Link row. Dragging a line or figure from the Geometry window to a Geometry Link row in an eA[...]

  • Seite 589

    20060301 (4) Tap [Insert] and then [Geometry Link]. • This inserts a Geometry Link row in the next line. 10-3-18 Inser ting Data into an eActivity (5) Tap the Geometry window to make it active. (6) Tap one side of the triangle to select it, and then drag it to the link symbol in the eActivity window. • This inputs the equation of the line that [...]

  • Seite 590

    20060301 10-4 W orking with eActivity Files You can perform basic file operations on eActivity files. You can open previously saved files, edit an existing file, and save a file under a new name. Opening an Existing eActivity Perform the following steps to open an existing eActivity file. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the eActivity window, tap [...]

  • Seite 591

    20060301 Editing the Contents of an eActivity To edit an eActivity, you can use the same procedures that you used when you created it. For more information, see “10-3 Inserting Data into an eActivity”. Expanding an Application Data Strip Tapping the expand button of an application data strip expands the application data in the lower window. The[...]

  • Seite 592

    20060301 u T o replace the original eActivity file with the newl y edited version (1) On the eActivity window, tap [File] and then [Save]. • This displays the Files dialog box. 10-4-3 Working with eActivity Files (2) Tap [Save] without changing the displayed file name. • This causes the original eActivity file to be replaced by the newly edi[...]

  • Seite 593

    20060301 u T o save an edited eActivity under a different name (1) On the eActivity window, tap { , or tap [File] and then [Save]. • This displays the Files dialog box. (2) If you want, tap the name of the folder where you want the new eActivity file to be saved. (3) Tap the file name input box, and input the new file name you want to use. (4)[...]

  • Seite 594

    20060301 10-5 T ransferring eActivity Files Note the following precautions when using the ClassPad’s data communication function to transfer eActivity files with another ClassPad unit or a computer. T ransferring eActivity Files between T w o ClassPad Units k T ransf erring eActivity Files to Another ClassPad Unit To transfer an eActivity file [...]

  • Seite 595

    20060301 k T ransf erring eActivity Files from Another ClassP ad Unit To transfer an eActivity file from another ClassPad unit, your ClassPad unit must support all of the application data strips that are supported by the sending unit. Important! • If you transfer an eActivity file from a ClassPad unit that supports application data strips that [...]

  • Seite 596

    20060301 Using the Presentation Application The Presentation application lets you capture screenshots of other application windows. Screenshots can be used in the classroom or for other presentations simply by connecting the ClassPad to an OHP projector. 11-1 Presentation Application Overview 11-2 Building a Presentation 11-3 Managing Presentation [...]

  • Seite 597

    20060301 11-1-1 Presentation Application Overview 11-1 Presentation Application Overvie w The Presentation application lets you capture screenshots produced by the ClassPad, and arrange them into a “presentation” that you can play back. With this application you can build and play a presentation, and edit the contents of a presentation. A prese[...]

  • Seite 598

    20060301 Presentation Application Window Tapping P on the application menu starts the Presentation application and displays its initial screen. • Selecting [Disabled] will cause the [Screen Copy To] setting on the Presentation and Communication dialog boxes to change automatically to [Outer Device]. For more information, see “11-6 Configuring [...]

  • Seite 599

    20060301 Presentation Application Menus and Buttons This section explains the operations you can perform using the menus and buttons of the Presentation application’s initial screen. k Initial Screen Menu Commands and Buttons T o do this: Ta p th is button: Or select this menu item: Delete the presentation file whose option button is currently s[...]

  • Seite 600

    20060301 Screen Capture Precautions Note the following precautions when capturing screens for a presentation. • The operation that is performed when you tap h depends on the current [Screen Copy To] setting as described below. W h en t h e [ Sc reen Cop y T o ] sett ing is this: T apping h does this: Outer Device Sends the screenshot to an extern[...]

  • Seite 601

    20060301 11-2 Building a Presentation Presentations are created by capturing screenshots that are produced by the applications of the ClassPad. Before actually beginning to capture the screenshots, it is important to carefully think about and plan the type of information you want to include in your presentation so that your screenshots display the [...]

  • Seite 602

    20060301 (6) With the screen you want to capture on the display, tap h . • The curren tly di splaye d scre en is captur ed as soon a s you tap h . Its i mage i s adde d to the pages of the presentation file you selected in step (3). • If the capture is successful, “ ” appears in the status bar for about one second. (7) Repeat steps (5) and[...]

  • Seite 603

    20060301 u T o insert a blank page into a presentation (1) On the Presentation application initial screen, tap the button next to the presentation file into which you want to insert the blank page, so it is selected. (2) Tap a and then [White Screen]. • This inserts a blank page as the final p age of the presentation file you selected in step [...]

  • Seite 604

    20060301 11-3 Managing Presentation Files After you create a presentation file, you can rename it or delete it. u T o rename a presentation file (1) On the Presentation application initial screen, tap the name of the file you want to rename so it is selected. (2) Press e . • This causes a cursor to appear to the right of the last character of [...]

  • Seite 605

    20060301 11-3-2 Managing Presentation Files Important! • PICT format image data files (PICT data type variables) captured with the h icon are stored in folder that is created when you create a Presentation file. • The “Presystm” folder (whose contents you can view with the Variable Manager) contains files for managing presentations. Norm[...]

  • Seite 606

    20060301 11-4 Playing a Presentation This section explains the various methods you can use to play a presentation. Using A uto Play With auto play, the pages of the presentation are scrolled automatically at a fixed interval. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the Presentation application initial screen, tap the button next to the presentation file you [...]

  • Seite 607

    20060301 Using Manual Pla y With manual play, you control when page change operations are performed during presentation play. Manual play lets you scroll forward or back through presentation pages, and you can display a pointer on a page. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the Presentation application initial screen, tap the button next to the presentatio[...]

  • Seite 608

    20060301 (4) Tapping while the final page of the presentation is displayed causes the message “End of Files” to appear in the status bar. • Tapping while the message “End of Files” is in the status bar exits the manual play operation and displays the Presentation initial screen. Tapping while “End of Files” is in the status bar retur[...]

  • Seite 609

    20060301 11-5 Editing Presentation P ages This section explains how to use the Editing mode of the Presentation application to modify the pages of an existing presentation. About the Editing T ool Palette An editing tool palette appears on the display whenever you enter the Editing mode. The following describes how to use the editing tool palette. [...]

  • Seite 610

    20060301 (3) Use the editing tool palette buttons to edit the pages. • For details about editing operations, see “Editing Operations” on page 11-5-3. • You can drag the editing tool palette and page scroll buttons to any location on the display. Simply use the stylus to drag the handle of the palette or buttons. u T o exit the Editing mode [...]

  • Seite 611

    20060301 Editing Operations This section provides details about the page editing operations you can perform with the Presentation application’s editing tool palette. u T o move a page (1) Enter the Editing mode of the Presentation application (page 11-5-1). (2) Use the page scroll buttons to display the page you want to move. (3) Tap 8 to move th[...]

  • Seite 612

    20060301 u T o copy and paste a page (1) Enter the Editing mode of the Presentation application (page 11-5-1). (2) Use the page scroll buttons to display the page you want to copy, and then tap t . • This copies the currently displayed page to the clipboard. (3) Use the page scroll buttons to display the page that you want to follow the copied pa[...]

  • Seite 613

    20060301 (6) To save the result of the text insert operation, tap { and then tap [OK] on the confirmation dialog box that appears. u T o c lear the bottom half of the screen (1) Enter the Editing mode of the Presentation application (page 11-5-1). (2) Use the page scroll buttons to display the page whose bottom half you want to clear. (3) Tap - . [...]

  • Seite 614

    20060301 u T o dra w a straight line or an arrow on a page (1) Enter the Editing mode of the Presentation application (page 11-5-1). (2) Use the page scroll buttons to display the page on which you want to draw a straight line or arrow. (3) Tap i if you want to draw a line or o if you want to draw an arrow. (4) Tap the point where you want one end [...]

  • Seite 615

    20060301 Using the Eraser The eraser allows you to erase parts of an image, text, arrows, or lines you have added to a page. u T o erase part of a page with the eraser (1) Enter the Editing mode of the Presentation application (page 11-5-1). (2) Use the page scroll arrows to display the page that contains the figures you want to erase. (3) Tap } .[...]

  • Seite 616

    20060301 11-6 Configuring Presentation Preferences You can use the procedure below to configure various Presentation application preferences. u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap O , and then [Presentation]. • This displays the Presentation dialog box. (2) Use the Presentation dialog box to configure the preferences you want. T o do this: Do this: Sen[...]

  • Seite 617

    20060301 Tip • The following examples show the area of the screen that is captured when you tap h while the [Half Screen Capturing] check box is selected. The captured areas are indicated by the thick boundaries in each example. Sample Screenshot Sample Screenshot Captured Image Data Captured Image Data 11-6-2 Configuring Presentation Preference[...]

  • Seite 618

    20060301 11-7 Presentation File T ransf er A presentation file is actually a kind of user folder (called a “presentation folder”) that contains the images that make up the presentation. This folder may be transferred to another ClassPad unit or a computer in order to play the presentation. Caution • A presentation created with Version 3.0 of[...]

  • Seite 619

    20060301 Chapter 1 2 Using the Pr ogram Application The Program application comes in handy when you need to perform the same calculation a number of times. You can create programs that automate graphing and other operations. 12-1 Program Application Overvie w 12-2 Creating a New Pr ogram 12-3 Debug ging a Program 12-4 Managing Files 12-5 User-defi[...]

  • Seite 620

    20060301 12-1 Pr ogram Application Overview The Program application consists of a Program Editor for inputting and editing programs, and a Program Loader for loading and executing existing programs. Starting Up the Program Application Use the following procedure to start up the Program application. u ClassP ad Operation On the application menu, tap[...]

  • Seite 621

    20060301 12-1-2 Program Application Ov er view T o do this: T ap this button: Or select this menu item: — Display the Program Loader window O - Program Loader P Display the Program Editor window O - Program Editor _ Display the Program Output window O - Program Output — Display the T ext File Contents window O - T ext File Contents ~ Display th[...]

  • Seite 622

    20060301 File type N: Program file T : Text file F : User-defined function file File name Parameter variables This box can be used to specify variable names used in user-defined functions or programs. For details, see “Configuring Parameter Variables and Inputting Their Values” on page 12-2-7. Program Editor Window You can use the Program[...]

  • Seite 623

    20060301 k Program Editor Window Menus and Buttons The following describes the menu and button operations you can perform on the Program Editor window. 12-1-4 Program Application Ov er view T o do this: T a p th i s b u t t o n: Or select this menu item: Display the Program Loader window Display the Program Editor window Display the Main applicatio[...]

  • Seite 624

    20060301 T o do this: Select this menu item: Input a command from the [Ctrl] menu • For details about each command, see “12-6 Program Command Reference”. Input a command from the [I/O] menu • For details about each command, see “12-6 Program Command Reference”. — — Lbl, Goto For, To, Step, Next Do, LpWhile While, WhileEnd ’, ”, [...]

  • Seite 625

    20060301 T o do this: Select this menu item: Input a command from the [Misc] menu • F or details about each command, see “12-6 Program Command Reference”. StatGraph, StatGraphSel, Scatter, xyLine, NPPlot, Histogram, MedBox, ModBox, NDist, Broken, LinearR, MedMed, QuadR, CubicR, QuartR, LogR, ExpR, abExpR, PowerR, SinR, LogisticR Square, Cross[...]

  • Seite 626

    20060301 T o do this: Select this menu item: Input a command from the [Misc] menu • For details about each command, see “12-6 Program Command Reference”. On, Off, DefaultSetup, SetStandard, SetDecimal, SetReal, SetComplex, SetDegree, SetGrad, SetRadian, SetNormal, SetFix, SetSci SetStatWinAuto, SetCellWidth, SetSequence, StepDisp, Set ∑ dis[...]

  • Seite 627

    20060301 12-2 Creating a Ne w Program This section explains the steps you need to perform in order to create a new program. General Programming Steps The following are the general steps for creating and running a program. 1. Open a new file. • Tap O , or select the [Edit] menu and then [New File]. 2. Input a name and tap [OK]. 3. Input the expre[...]

  • Seite 628

    20060301 u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap m to display the application menu, and then p . (2) Tap O , or tap [Edit] and then [New File]. (3) Configure the settings for the new file as described below. • Leave the [Type] setting as “Program(Normal)”. • Tap the [Folder] down arrow button and then select the name of the folder where you want to [...]

  • Seite 629

    20060301 12-2-3 Creating a New Progr am (6) After the program is the way you want, tap { , or tap [Edit] and then [Save File] to save it. • To run this program see “Running a Program” on page 12-2-5. • If a message appears when you try to save the program, make the necessary corrections and try again. For details about making corrections to[...]

  • Seite 630

    20060301 k Specifying the File T ype Tapping O or tapping [Edit] and then [New File] on the Program Editor window displays the dialog box shown above. Tap the [Type] down arrow button and then select one of the options described below from the list of options that appears. Tip • For information about text files, see “Using Text Files” below.[...]

  • Seite 631

    20060301 12-2-5 Creating a New Progr am Running a Program The following procedure shows how to run the sample program we input under “Creating and Saving a Program” on page 12-2-1. u ClassPad Operation (1) Display the Program Loader window. • From the Program Editor window, tap ) , or tap O and then [Program Loader]. • From another applicat[...]

  • Seite 632

    20060301 12-2-6 Creating a New Progr am P ausing Program Execution You can specify where execution of a program should pause by including either a Pause command or a W ait command inside the program. k Using the P ause Command A Pause command causes program execution to pause when it reaches that point. To resume program execution, tap the button o[...]

  • Seite 633

    20060301 12-2-7 Creating a New Progr am Configuring P arameter V ariables and Inputting Their V alues If you input the names of variables used in a program into the parameter variable box when inputting or editing a program on the Program Editor window, you will be able to input values for the variables on the Program Loader window when you run th[...]

  • Seite 634

    20060301 Using Subroutines Including the name of another program file inside of a program causes execution to jump to the specified program file. The program that execution jumps from is called the “main program”, while the program to which execution jumps is called a “subroutine”. When program execution returns to the main program, it r[...]

  • Seite 635

    20060301 Example 1: Jumping to a subroutine without assigning values to the subroutine’s parameter variables Main Program Input A Input B Sub1( ) ← Jumps to subroutine program “Sub1” Print C Subroutine (Pr ogram Name: “Sub1”) A+B S C Return Example 2: Jumping to a subroutine while assigning values to the subroutine’s parameter variabl[...]

  • Seite 636

    20060301 12-3 Deb ugging a Pr ogram A programming error that causes a program to behave in a manner not intended by the writer of the program is called a “bug”. Finding and eliminating such errors is called “debugging the program”. Any of the following conditions can indicate that your program has a bug and requires debugging. • If an err[...]

  • Seite 637

    20060301 Modifying an Existing Program to Create a Ne w One You can use the procedure described below to recall an existing program, modify it, and then run the result as a new program. This helps reduce key input requirements. The following shows how to modify the “OCTA” program we created on page 12-2-1 to handle tetrahedrons. Example: To cre[...]

  • Seite 638

    20060301 (3) Select the program you want to open and edit, as described below. 12-3-3 Debugging a Progr am (4) Tap [OK]. Folder Type Tap the down arrow button, and then select “Program(Normal)”. Tap the down arrow button, and then select the folder that contains the program you want to edit. Name Tap the down arrow button, and then select the n[...]

  • Seite 639

    20060301 (7) After saving the program, tap ) , or tap O and then [Program Loader] to display the Program Loader window. (8) On the dialog box that appears, tap the [Name] down arrow button, and then tap the name of the file you input in step (6) (TETRA). (9) Tap p , or tap [Run] and then [Run Program]. • This runs the program. (10) Input 7 for t[...]

  • Seite 640

    20060301 Searc hing for Data Inside a Program You can search for data inside a program by specifying a keyword. Example: To search for the letter “A” within the “OCTA” program u ClassPad Operation (1) From the Program Editor window, select the program you want to search (“OCTA” in this example). (2) Tap [Edit], [Search], and then [New S[...]

  • Seite 641

    20060301 12-4 Managing Files Renaming a File Use the following procedure when you want to change the name of a file. u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap 5 to display the Variable Manager. • This displays a list of folders. • You may need to tap the icon and scroll the toolbar to see the 5 icon. (2) Tap the name of the folder that contains the file y[...]

  • Seite 642

    20060301 Changing the File T ype You can use the following procedures to change the file type. u T o change a program file to a text file While a program file is open, tap [Edit], [Mode Change], and then [ ' Text]. u T o change a text file to a program file While a text file is open, tap [Edit], [Mode Change], and then [ ' No[...]

  • Seite 643

    20060301 12-5 User -defined Functions ClassPad lets you configure calculation operations as user-defined functions, which can then be used inside of numeric expressions just like its built-in functions. User-defined functions can also be called up in other applications. • The Program Editor window is used for creating user-defined functions.[...]

  • Seite 644

    20060301 (6) After the function is the way you want, tap { , or tap [Edit] and then [Save File] to save it. Tip • A user-defined function can contain only a single mathematical expression. An error “Invalid in a Function or Current Expression” occurs if a user-defined function contains multiple expressions, or is followed by a carriage retu[...]

  • Seite 645

    20060301 Tip • You can include up to 99 arguments in a function. • If you do not specify a folder, the function is stored in the current folder. • A function defined using the Define command can contain only a single expression. You cannot link multiple expressions or commands using colons ( : ) or carriage returns. Executing a User -defin[...]

  • Seite 646

    20060301 Editing a User-defined Function To edit an existing user-defined function, use the same procedures as those described under “Modifying an Existing Program to Create a New One” on page 12-3-2. Editing procedures are the same, regardless of whether you originally created the function using the Define command or Program Editor. Deletin[...]

  • Seite 647

    20060301 12-6 Pr ogram Command Reference Using This Reference The following table shows the conventions that are used in the descriptions of this section. 12-6-1 Program Command Ref erence A boldface word, lik e Input It means this: If you see something like this: The boldface word is a command. 10 This is a constant. 10 + 20 This is an arithmetic [...]

  • Seite 648

    20060301 Program Application Commands k Program Notation (Carriage Return) Function: Performs a carriage return operation. Description In Program Editor, tap the w button to input a carriage return. • The carriage return can be used in a user program. It cannot, however, be used in a manual calculation performed in the Main application. ’ (Comm[...]

  • Seite 649

    20060301 k Input GetKe y Syntax: GetKey  <variable name> Function: This command assigns the code number of the last key pressed to the specified variable. Description • This command assigns the code number of the last key pressed to the specified variable. The following shows a list of available code numbers. 12-6-3 Program Command Ref[...]

  • Seite 650

    20060301 12-6-4 Program Command Ref erence GetP en Syntax: GetPen  <variable name 1>, <variable name 2> Function: This command assigns the coordinates of the point tapped on the screen to a specified variable. Description This command assigns the x -coordinate (horizontal axis) to <variable 1> and the y -coordinate (vertical a[...]

  • Seite 651

    20060301 InputFunc Syntax: InputFunc  <user-defined function name> (<argument >[,<argument >…]) [,"<string 1>"[,"<string 2>"]] Function: When program execution reaches the InputFunc command, the user is prompted to input the contents of the user-defined function. Example: InputFunc v(v0, t), [...]

  • Seite 652

    20060301 12-6-6 Program Command Ref erence k Output About the Program Output windo w The “Program Output window” shows text dis played by progr am exec ution. T he term “Progra m Output window” does not include dialog boxes displayed by Message and other commands. • Only one Program Output window can be stored at a time. Executing the Clr[...]

  • Seite 653

    20060301 Locate Syntax 1: Locate  < x -coordinate>, < y -coordinate>, <expression> Syntax 2: Locate  < x -coordinate>, < y -coordinate>, "<string>" Function: This command displays the result of the specified expression or the specified text string at the specified coordinates on the display scr[...]

  • Seite 654

    20060301 PrintNatural Syntax:    PrintNatural  <expression>[,"<string>"] Function: This command pauses program execution and displays the result of the specified expression in natural format. 12-6-8 Program Command Ref erence Description • A text string enclosed within quotation marks (" ") or a variable na[...]

  • Seite 655

    20060301 12-6-9 Program Command Ref erence Break Syntax: Break Function: This command terminates a loop and causes execution to advance to the next command following the loop process. Description • Break terminates a loop and causes execution to advance to the next command following the loop process. • Break can be used inside of a For , Do , W[...]

  • Seite 656

    20060301 For ~ T o ~ (Step ~)Next Syntax: F o r  <e xpr ess ion 1> S <c ont rol va ria ble na me>  To  <e xpr ess ion 2> [S tep  <e xpr ess ion 3> ] [<statement>] … Next <expression 1> is the initial value, <expression 2> is the end value, and <expression 3> is the step. Function Anythin[...]

  • Seite 657

    20060301 If~Then~ElseIf~Else~IfEnd Syntax 1: If  <expression> Then [<statement>] … IfEnd Function 1 • If the expression is true, the statement in the Then block is executed. After that, execution advances to the next statement after IfEnd . • If the expression is false, execution advances to the next statement after IfEnd , wit[...]

  • Seite 658

    20060301 Syntax 4: If  <expression> Then [<statement>] … ElseIf  <expression> Then [<statement>] … Else [<statement>] … IfEnd Function 4 • If the expression is t rue, the statement in the If Then block is executed. Aft er that, execution advances to the next statement after IfEnd . • If the If command e[...]

  • Seite 659

    20060301 Description • You can perform manual operations on the ClassPad display screen while program execution is paused by the Pause command. • Program execution remains paused until you tap the button on the status bar, or until six minutes pass (after which program execution resumes automatically). Return Syntax: Return 䡺 {<variable>[...]

  • Seite 660

    20060301 Switch~Case~Default~SwitchEnd Syntax: Switch  <expression 1> Case  <expression 2> [<statement>] … Break Case  <expression 3> … [<statement>] … Break … Case  <expression n > [<statement>] … Break [Default] [<statement>] … SwitchEnd <expression 1> through <expre[...]

  • Seite 661

    20060301 While~WhileEnd Syntax: While  <expression> [<statement>] … WhileEnd <expression> is a condition that evaluates to true or false. Function: The specified statements are repeated as long as the condition is true. Description • The statements between While~WhileEnd are repeated as long as the condition is true. When [...]

  • Seite 662

    20060301 ClrGraph Syntax: ClrGraph Function: Clears the Graph window and returns View Window parameters to their initial default settings. Cls Syntax: Cls Function: Clears sketch elements (lines and other figures sketched on the Graph window), and graphs drawn using drag and drop. DispFT ab le Syntax: DispFTable Function: Creates and displays a fu[...]

  • Seite 663

    20060301 DrawGraph Syntax: DrawGraph  [<expression>] Function: Graphs the selected expression or an expression specified as a parameter. Description: <expression> has a y = type expression on the right side. Graphing of any other type of expression is not supported by this command. Example: DrawGraph: Graphs the currently selected e[...]

  • Seite 664

    20060301 GTSelOn Syntax: GTSelOn  <graph number> Function: Selects a graph expression. Description: Graph number range: 1 to 100 Horizontal Syntax: Horizontal  <y -coordinate> Function: Draws a horizontal line. In verse Syntax: Inverse  < y or x graph number> Function: Graphs the inverse of a function. Description: Graph [...]

  • Seite 665

    20060301 PlotOff Syntax: PlotOff  < x -coordinate>, < y -coordinate> Function: Turns off display of the plot at the specified coordinates. PlotOn Syntax: PlotOn  < x -coordinate>, < y -coordinate> Function: Turns on display of the plot at the specified coordinates. plotT est( Syntax: plotTest(< x -coordinate>, [...]

  • Seite 666

    20060301 PTThick Syntax: PTThick  <graph number> Function: Specifies “Thick” ( ) as the graph line type. Description: Graph number range: 1 to 100 PxlChg Syntax: PxlChg  < x -dot>, < y -dot> Function: Toggles display of the specified pixel on and off. Example: PxlChg 5,1 PxlOff Syntax: PxlOff  < x -dot>, < [...]

  • Seite 667

    20060301 RclVWin Syntax: RclVWin  <variable name> Function: Recalls View Window values, which were previously saved under the specified name. Example: RclVWin WIN1 SheetActive Syntax: SheetActive   { <sheet number> } "<sheet name>" Function: Selects the sheet that contains the expression to be graphed. Descript[...]

  • Seite 668

    20060301 StoPict Syntax: StoPict  <picture name> Function: Assigns a name to a Pict image and stores it. Example: StoPict Pict1 StoVWin Syntax: StoVWin  <variable name> Function: Assigns a name to View Window values and stores them. Example: StoVWin VWIN1 T angentLine Syntax: TangentLine  <graph number>, < x -coordinat[...]

  • Seite 669

    20060301 ViewWindo w Syntax1: ViewWindow  LogP  { x y xy } , [xmin value], [xmax value], [xscale value], [ymin value], [ymax value], [yscale value], [t θ min value], [t θ max value], [t θ step value] Syntax 2: ViewWindow CallUndef Syntax 3: ViewWindow Function: Syntax 1: Specifies View Window values. Syntax 2: Makes all View Window val[...]

  • Seite 670

    20060301 k 3D ClearSheet3D Syntax: ClearSheet3D  { <sheet number> } "<sheet name>" Function: Deletes the sheet name and expressions on the sheet, and returns its settings to their default values. Omitting the argument causes all sheets to be cleared. Draw3D Syntax: Draw3D Function: Draws a 3D graph using current settings. S[...]

  • Seite 671

    20060301 k Conics DrawConics Syntax: DrawConics Function: Draws a conics graph based on the data registered on the Conics Editor window. k Sequence DispDfrTbl Syntax: DispDfrTbl Function: Creates and displays an arithmetic sequence table. DispDQTbl Syntax: DispDQTbl Function: Creates and displays a progression of difference table. DispFibTbl Syntax[...]

  • Seite 672

    20060301 DrawSeqCon, DrawSeqPlt Syntax: DrawSeqCon DrawSeqPlt Function: Graphs a recursion expression whose vertical axis is a n ( b n or c n ) and whose horizontal axis is n using a generated number table, in accordance with the conditions of each command. Description: DrawSeqCon draws a connect type graph, while DrawSeqPlt draws a plot type graph[...]

  • Seite 673

    20060301 SeqSelOn Syntax: SeqSelOn  a n +1 a n +2 b n +1 b n +2 c n +1 c n +2 a n E b n E c n E Function: Selects the sp ecified sequence expression. Specify ing “ a n E”, “ b n E”, or “ c n E” as the argument activ ates [Explicit]. Specifyin g any other argument acti vates [Recursive]. SeqT ype Syntax: SeqType  " n "[...]

  • Seite 674

    20060301 DefaultListEditor Syntax: DefaultListEditor Function: Initializes the sort sequence and display contents of the list on the Stat Editor window (list1 to list6). DispListEditor Syntax: DispListEditor Function: Displays the Stat Editor window. DispStat Syntax: DispStat Function: Displays previous statistical calculation results. DrawStat Syn[...]

  • Seite 675

    20060301 LinearReg Syntax: LinearReg  x List, y List[,[FreqList (or 1)][, [< yn >][, { On Off } ]]] Function: Performs y = a ⋅ x + b regression. Description x List: Name of list for storing x -axis data y List: Name of list for storing y -axis data FreqList: Name of list for storing frequency of “ x List” and “ y List” data • ?[...]

  • Seite 676

    20060301 MultiSortA Syntax 1: MultiSortA  <list name> Syntax 2: MultiSortA  <base list name>, <subordinate list name>, <subordinate list name>, ... Function: Sorts a statistical list in ascending order. Description • Syntax 1 performs a simple list sort. • Syntax 2 sorts multiple lists on the base list. Up to five[...]

  • Seite 677

    20060301 QuadReg Syntax: QuadReg  x List, y List[,[FreqList (or 1)][,[< yn >][, { On Off } ]]] Function: Performs y = a ⋅ x 2 + b ⋅ x + c regression. Description x List: Name of list for storing x -axis data y List: Name of list for storing y -axis data FreqList: Name of list for storing frequency of “ x List” and “ y List” dat[...]

  • Seite 678

    20060301 StatGraph Syntax 1: StatGraph  <StatGraph number 1 to 9>, { On Off } , Graph Type 1, x List, y List, FreqList (or 1), Plot Type Syntax 2: StatGraph  <StatGraph number 1 to 9>, { On Off } , Graph Type 2, x List, y List, FreqList (or 1) Syntax 3: StatGraph  <StatGraph number 1 to 9>, { On Off } , Graph Type 3, x Li[...]

  • Seite 679

    20060301 12-6-33 Program Command Ref erence k Setup DefaultSetup Syntax: DefaultSetup Function: Initializes all setup data settings. SetAxes Syntax: SetAxes  { On Number Off } Function: Turns display of Graph window axes on or off. SetAxes3D Syntax: SetAxes3D  { On Off Box } Function: Turns display of axes on (normal), off, or Bo x (box ty[...]

  • Seite 680

    20060301 SetCoord Syntax: SetCoord  { On Off } Function: Turns display of Graph window pointer coordinates on or off. SetCoordOff3D Syntax: SetCoordOff3D Function: Turns off display of pointer coordinates for 3D graphing. SetCoordP ol3D Syntax: SetCoordPol3D Function: Specifies use of polar coordinates for coordinate display during 3D graphing.[...]

  • Seite 681

    20060301 SetDispGCon Syntax: SetDispGCon  { On Off } Function: Turns display of graph controller arrows during graphing on or off. SetDrawCon Syntax: SetDrawCon Function: Specifies graphing by connecting plotting points with lines. SetDrawPlt Syntax: SetDrawPlt Function: Specifies graphing by plotting points only. SetFix Syntax: SetFix  <[...]

  • Seite 682

    20060301 SetLabel3D Syntax: SetLabel3D  { On Off } Function: Turns display of Graph window axis labels for 3D graphing on or off. SetLeadCursor Syntax: SetLeadCursor  { On Off } Function: Turns display of the leading cursor during graphing on or off. SetNormal Syntax: SetNormal  { 1 } 2 Function: Specifies Normal 1 or Normal 2 as the a[...]

  • Seite 683

    20060301 SetSequence Syntax: SetSequence  { On Off StepDisp } Function: Turns display of expressions created after graphing on or off or specifies “step display” ( StepDisp ). Description: When StepDis p is se lected , the e xpressi on doe s not a ppear u ntil yo u pres s E . SetSimulGraph Syntax: SetSimulGraph  { On Off } Function: Turn[...]

  • Seite 684

    20060301 SetTV ariable Syntax: SetTVariable  { <list name> } TableInput Function: Specifies the variable reference location for table generation. Description: Use T ableInput to specify a range and generate a table. Set Σ disp Syntax: Set Σ disp  { On Off } Function: Turns display of subtotals for tables on or off. k Folder/V ariable[...]

  • Seite 685

    20060301 DelFolder Syntax: DelFolder  <folder name> Function: Deletes a folder. DelV ar Syntax: DelVar  <variable name>, <variable name> ... Function: Deletes a variable. Description: Deletes all variables, regardless of type (program, etc.), that have the specified variable name. See GetT ype for information about variable[...]

  • Seite 686

    20060301 Local Syntax: Local  <variable name>, <variable name> ... Function: Defines a local variable. Description The following are the merits of local variables. • Since local variables are deleted automatically, use of local variables for temporary storage avoids unnecessary use of available memory. • Since local variables do[...]

  • Seite 687

    20060301 SetFolder Syntax: SetFolder  <folder name> [,<storage variable name>] Function • Makes the specified folder the current folder. Including a variable name at the end of this command assigns the name of the previous current folder to the variable as a text string. • If the specified folder does not exist, this command cr[...]

  • Seite 688

    20060301 ExpT oStr Syntax: ExpToStr  <expression>,<storage variable name> Function: Converts the result of an input expression to a string and assigns the string to the specified variable. NumT oChr Syntax: NumToChr  n ,<storage variable name> Function: Converts numeric value n to the corresponding text character(s) in acco[...]

  • Seite 689

    20060301 StrJoin Syntax: StrJoin  "<string 1>", "<string 2>", <storage variable name> Function: Joins "<string 1>" and "<string 2>" and then assigns the resulting string to the specified variable. StrLeft Syntax: StrLeft  "<string>", n , <storage variabl[...]

  • Seite 690

    20060301 StrRotate Syntax: StrRotate  "<string>", <storage variable name> [, n ] Function: Rotates the left side part and right side part of a string at the n th character, and assigns the resulting string to the specified variable. Description: Rotation is to the left when “ n ” is positive, and to the right when “ [...]

  • Seite 691

    20060301 k Other CloseComP or t38k Syntax: CloseComPort38k Function: Closes the 3-pin COM port. Example: See the GetV ar38k command. GetV ar38k Syntax: GetVar38k  <variable name> Function: Receives variable names and variable contents. Description • The OpenComP or t38k command must be executed before this command is executed. • The Cl[...]

  • Seite 692

    20060301 OpenComP or t38k Syntax: OpenComPort38k Function: Opens the 3-pin COM port. Example: See the GetV ar38k command on page 12-6-45. Receive38k Syntax: Receive38k  <variable name> Function: Receives EA-200 data. Description • The OpenComP or t38k command must be executed before this command is executed. • The CloseComP or t38k com[...]

  • Seite 693

    20060301 12-7 Inc luding ClassP ad Functions in Programs Including Graphing Functions in a Pr ogram Graphing functions let your program graph multiple equations, or overlay multiple graphs on the same screen. Example: DefaultSetup ClrGraph ViewWindow 0, 7.7, 1, –14, 110, 10 GraphType "y=" Define y1(x) = x^4 – x^3 – 24x^2 + 4x + 80 [...]

  • Seite 694

    20060301 Including 3D Graphing Functions in a Pr ogram The methods for using 3D graphing functions in a program are identical to those for normal (non-3D) graphing functions, except that you can only graph one 3D graph at a time. For information about commands that are unique to 3D graphing, see “3D” on page 12-6-24. Including T able & Grap[...]

  • Seite 695

    20060301 12-7-3 Including ClassP ad Functions in Programs Including Recur sion T ab le and Recursion Graph Functions in a Program Recursion table and recursion graph functions can be included in a program to generate number tables and draw graphs. Example: DefaultSetup ViewWindow 0, 6, 1, – 0.01, 0.3, 1 SeqType "a n+1 a 0 " "–3a [...]

  • Seite 696

    20060301 12-7-4 Including ClassP ad Functions in Programs Including Statistical Graphing and Calculation Functions in a Pr ogram Including statistical graphs and calculation functions in a program allows the program to draw statistical graphs and display statistical calculation results. u T o perform statistical graphing Example 1: Scatter Diagram [...]

  • Seite 697

    20060301 u T o use statistical calculation functions You can perform the following types of statistical calculations using program commands. • Single-variable statistics • Paired-variable statistics • Regression • Tests • Confidence interval • Probability See “Chapter 7 – Using the Statistics Application” for more information. u [...]

  • Seite 698

    20060301 Chapter 1 3 Using the Spreadsheet Application The Spreadsheet application provides you with powerful, take- along-anywhere spreadsheet capabilities on your ClassPad. 13-1 Spreadsheet Application Overview 13-2 Spreadsheet Application Menus and Buttons 13-3 Basic Spreadsheet Windo w Operations 13-4 Editing Cell Contents 13-5 Using the Spread[...]

  • Seite 699

    20060301 13-1-1 Spreadsheet Application Overview 13-1 Spreadsheet Application Overview This section desc ribes the configuration of the Spreadsheet application window , and provides basic information about its menus and commands. Starting Up the Spreadsheet Application Use the following procedure to start up the Spreadsheet application. u ClassPad[...]

  • Seite 700

    20060301 13-2-1 Spreadsheet Application Menus and Buttons 13-2 Spreadsheet Application Menus and Buttons This section explains the operations you can perform using the menus and buttons of the Spreadsheet application window. • For information about the O menu, see “Using the O Menu” on page 1-5-4. k File Menu T o do this: Select this [File] m[...]

  • Seite 701

    20060301 13-2-2 Spreadsheet Application Menus and Buttons k Edit Menu T o do this: Select this [Edit] menu item: Undo the last action, or redo the action you have just undone Undo/Redo Display a dialog box that lets you show or hide scrollbars, and specify the direction the cursor advances when inputting data Options Automatically resize columns to[...]

  • Seite 702

    20060301 k Spreadsheet T oolbar Buttons Not all of the Spreadsheet buttons can fit on a single toolbar, tap the u / t button on the far right to toggle between the two toolbars. T o do this: T ap this b utton: Tog gle th e s ele cte d c ell (s) be twe en dec ima l ( floa tin g p oin t) and ex act display* 1 . / , Toggle the selected cell(s) betwe[...]

  • Seite 703

    20060301 13-3-1 Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations 13-3 Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations This section contains information about how to control the appearance of the Spreadsheet window, and how to perform other basic operations. About the Cell Cursor The cell cursor causes the current selected cell or group of cells to become highlighted. The l[...]

  • Seite 704

    20060301 13-3-2 Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations (2) On the dialog box that appears, tap the [Cursor Movement] down arrow button, and then select the setting you want. T o ha ve the cell cursor behave this way when y ou register input: Select this setting: Remain at the current cell Off Move to the next row below the current cell Down Move to th[...]

  • Seite 705

    20060301 13-3-3 Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations k Jumping to a Cell You can use the following procedure to jump to a specific cell on the Spreadsheet screen by specifying the cell’s column and row. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the [Edit] menu, select [Goto Cell]. (2) On the dial og box that appears, type in a letter to specify the column of t[...]

  • Seite 706

    20060301 13-3-4 Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations Hiding or Displaying the Scr ollbars Use the following procedure to turn display of Spreadsheet scrollbars on and off. By turning off the scrollbars, you make it possible to view more information in the spreadsheet. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the [Edit] menu, tap [Options]. (2) On the dialog box [...]

  • Seite 707

    20060301 13-3-5 Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations Tap a row heading to select the row. Tap a column heading to select the column. Tap a cell to select it. Tap here to select the entire spreadsheet. Selecting Cells Before performing any operation on a cell, you must first select it. You can select a single cell, a range of cells, all the cells in[...]

  • Seite 708

    20060301 13-3-6 Basic Spreadsheet Window Operations Using the Cell Viewer Window The Cell Viewer window lets you view both the formula contained in a cell, as well as the current value produced by the formula. While the Cell Viewer window is displayed, you can select or clear its check boxes to toggle display of the value and/or formula on or off. [...]

  • Seite 709

    20060301 13-4-1 Editing Cell Contents 13-4 Editing Cell Contents This section explains how to enter the edit mode for data input and editing, and how to input various types of data and expressions into cells. Edit Mode Screen The Spreadsheet application automatically enters the edit mode whenever you tap a cell to select it and input something from[...]

  • Seite 710

    20060301 • You can tap the data input toolbar buttons to input letters and symbols into the edit box. Entering the Edit Mode There are two ways you can enter the edit mode: • Tapping a cell and then tapping inside the edit box • Tapping a cell and inputting something on the keypad The following explains the difference between these two techni[...]

  • Seite 711

    20060301 k Tapping a cell and then inputting something from the keypad • This enters the “quick” edit mode, indicated by a dashed blinking cursor. Anything you input with the keypad will be displayed in the edit box. • If the cell you selected already contains something, anything you input with the quick edit mode replaces the existing cont[...]

  • Seite 712

    20060301 Inputting a Formula A formula is an expression that the Spreadsheet application calculates and evaluates when you input it, when data related to the formula is changed, etc. A formula always starts with an equal sign (=), and can contain any one of the following. • Values • Mathematical expressions • Cell references • ClassPad soft[...]

  • Seite 713

    20060301 (3) Press k to display the soft keyboard. (4) Tap the 0 tab and then tap r , o , w , then press ( , or on the [Action] menu, tap [row]. (5) Tap cell A1, and then press ) . (6) Press E . (7) Tap cell B1 and then press = . (8) On the soft keyboard, tap the 9 tab, tap - , and then tap - . (9) Tap cell A1, press , , x , , , 1 , and then press [...]

  • Seite 714

    20060301 (15) On the [Edit] menu, tap [Paste]. • Learn more about cell referencing below. Inputting a Cell Reference A cell reference is a symbol that references the value of one cell for use by another cell. If you input “=A1 + B1” into cell C2, for example, the Spreadsheet will add the current value of cell A1 to the current value of cell B[...]

  • Seite 715

    20060301 k Absolute Cell References An absolute cell reference is the one that does not change, regardless of where it is located or where it is copied to or moved to. You can make both the row and column of a cell reference absolute, or you can make only the row or only the column of a cell reference absolute, as described below. This cell referen[...]

  • Seite 716

    20060301 A constant is data whose value is defined when it is input. When you input something into a cell for which text is specified as the data type without an equal sign (=) at the beginning, a numeric value is treated as a constant and non-numeric values are treated as text. Note the following examples for cells of u type: This input: Is inte[...]

  • Seite 717

    20060301 13-4-9 Editing Cell Contents Using the Fill Sequence Command The Fill Sequence command lets you set up an expression with a variable, and input a range of values based on the calculated results of the expression. u To input a range of values using Fill Sequence Example: To configure a Fill Sequence operation according to the following par[...]

  • Seite 718

    20060301 • The following shows how the Fill Sequence dialog box s hould appear after configuring the parameters for our example. 13-4-10 Editing Cell Contents (3) After everything is the way you want, tap [OK]. • This performs all the required calculations according to your settings, and inserts the results into the spreadsheet. • The follow[...]

  • Seite 719

    20060301 Cut and Copy You can use the [Cut] and [Copy] commands on the Spreadsheet application [Edit] menu to cut and copy the contents of the cells currently selected (highlighted) with the cell cursor. You can also cut and copy text from the edit box. The following types of cut/copy operations are supported. • Single cell cut/copy • Multiple-[...]

  • Seite 720

    20060301 • The following shows how cell data is converted to a matrix format when pasted into the edit box. 13-4-12 Editing Cell Contents Select the cell where you want to insert the text (A6 in this example), and then tap inside the edit box. Tap [Edit], and then [Paste]. To view the matrix as text, tap the cell (A6) and then A . To view the mat[...]

  • Seite 721

    20060301 13-4-13 Editing Cell Contents Specifying Text or Calculation as the Data Type for a Particular Cell A simple toolbar button operation lets you specify that the data contained in the currently selected cell or cells should be treated as either text or calculation data. The following shows how the specified data type affects how a calculati[...]

  • Seite 722

    20060301 Using Drag and Drop to Copy Cell Data within a Spreadsheet You can also copy data from one cell to another within a spreadsheet using drag and drop. If the destination cell already contains data, it is replaced with the newly dropped data. • When performing this operation, you can drag and drop between cells, or from one location to anot[...]

  • Seite 723

    20060301 13-4-15 Editing Cell Contents Selection boundary (cursor held against C2) k Dragging and Dropping Multiple Cells • When dragging multiple cells, only the cell where the stylus is located has a selection boundary around it. Selection boundary dropped here (A8) • When you release the stylus from the screen, the top left cell of the group[...]

  • Seite 724

    20060301 13-4-16 Editing Cell Contents u To drag and drop within the edit box (1) Select the cell whose contents you want to edit. (2) Tap the edit box to enter the edit mode. (3) Tap the edit box again to display the editing cursor (a solid blinking cursor). (4) Drag the stylus across the characters you want to move, so they are highlighted. (5) H[...]

  • Seite 725

    20060301 u To use drag and drop to obtain the data points of a graph Example: To obtain the data points of the bar graph shown below 13-4-17 Editing Cell Contents (1) Input data and draw a bar graph. • See “Other Graph Window Operations” on page 13-8-15 for more information on graphing. (2) Tap the Graph window to make it active. (3) Tap the [...]

  • Seite 726

    20060301 Example: To assign values to variables and recalculate expressions that contain them. The following procedure shows the recalculate operation while the Spreadsheet application is being accessed from the Main application. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap J . This starts the Main application and displays the work area. ([...]

  • Seite 727

    20060301 (4) On the Main application window, use the following operation to assign values to the variables. 9 bcd W0a E 9 efg W0b E (5) On the Spreadsheet window, tap cell A1 and input =a+b. Next, tap cell A2 and input =a × b. When you input the above expressions, the results will appear dynamically in cells A1 and A2. 13-4-19 Editing Cell Content[...]

  • Seite 728

    20060301 (6) On the Main application window, assign different values to the variables. Here, assign 789 to variable b as shown below. 9 hij W0b E (7) Tap the Spreadsheet application window to make it active. On the [File] menu, tap [Recalculate]. This recalculates the expressions in the Spreadsheet window and displays their results. 13-4-20 Editing[...]

  • Seite 729

    20060301 13-4-21 Editing Cell Contents Importing and Exporting Variable Values You can use the procedures in this section to import the data currently assigned to a variable into a spreadsheet, and to export data in a spreadsheet to a variable. k Importing data assigned to a variable into a spreadsheet You can import the data assigned to a variable[...]

  • Seite 730

    20060301 13-4-22 Editing Cell Contents (4) After confirming that everything is the way you want, tap [OK]. • This will input the data assigned to the NData variable (in this case, 1234567890) into spreadsheet cell A1 as shown here. u To import the data assigned to a LIST variable Example: To import the list data {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} assigned to the L[...]

  • Seite 731

    20060301 13-4-23 Editing Cell Contents u To import the data assigned to a MAT variable Example: To import the matrix data        assigned to the MData variable at cell A1 (1) Tap cell A1 to select it. (2) On the [File] menu, tap [Import]. • This displays the Import dialog box along with a soft keyboard. (3) Type the variable name (in [...]

  • Seite 732

    20060301 13-4-24 Editing Cell Contents k Exporting Spreadsheet Data to a Variable You can use the procedures in this section to export the data contained in a specific cell or range of cells in the spreadsheet that is currently open on the ClassPad display. Export of spreadsheet data to the variables of the following data types is supported: LIST [...]

  • Seite 733

    20060301 13-4-25 Editing Cell Contents u To export spreadsheet data to a MAT (Matrix) variable (1) Select the range of cells that contains the data you want to export to a Mat variable. (2) On the [File] menu, tap [Export]. This displays the Export dialog box along with a soft keyboard. (3) Tap the [Type] box down arrow button, and then select “M[...]

  • Seite 734

    20060301 13-4-26 Editing Cell Contents Searching for Data in a Spreadsheet The Search command helps you locate specific data in a spreadsheet quickly and easily. k Search Dialog Box The Search command can be executed either by tapping [Search] on the [Edit] menu or by tapping the e button on the toolbar. Executing the Search command displays a sea[...]

  • Seite 735

    20060301 13-4-27 Editing Cell Contents k Search Examples Example 1: To search for the letter “a”, regardless of case u ClassPad Operation (1) Display the spreadsheet you want to search. • This example is based on a spreadsheet that contains the data shown below. (2) Tap [Search] on the [Edit] menu or tap the toolbar e button. • This display[...]

  • Seite 736

    20060301 13-4-28 Editing Cell Contents (5) To search for the next instance of the search string, tap [Search Again] on the [Edit] menu or tap the toolbar r button. • Each time you tap the [Search Again] command or the r toolbar button, the search will jump to the next cell that contains the specified search string. • The message “Search Stri[...]

  • Seite 737

    20060301 13-4-29 Editing Cell Contents (4) Tap [OK]. • This will start the search and the cursor will jump to the first cell found that contains a match for the search string. (5) To search for the next instance of the search string, tap [Search Again] on the [Edit] menu or tap the toolbar r button. • Each time you tap the [Search Again] comma[...]

  • Seite 738

    20060301 13-4-30 Editing Cell Contents (2) On the [Edit] menu, tap [Sort]. • This displays the Sort dialog box. The [Range] box will show the range of cells you selected in step 1. (3) Tap the [Key Column] box down arrow button. On the list that appears, select the column you want the sort to be based upon. (4) Tap either [Ascending] (a, b, c...)[...]

  • Seite 739

    20060301 13-5-1 Using the Spreadsheet Application with the eActivity Application 13-5 Using the Spreadsheet Application with the eActivity Application You can display the S preadsheet application from within the eActivity application. This makes it possible to drag data between the Spreadsheet and eActivity windows as desired. Drag and Dr op After [...]

  • Seite 740

    20060301 13-5-2 Using the Spreadsheet Application with the eActivity Application (4) Select the cell you want and drag it to the first available line in the eActivity window. • This inserts the contents of the cell in the eActivity window. • You can also select something in the edit box and drag it to the eActivity window. If you do, the edit [...]

  • Seite 741

    20060301 13-5-3 Using the Spreadsheet Application with the eActivity Application (5) Drag the contents of the edit box to the first available line in the eActivity window. • This inserts the contents of the edit box in the eActivity window as a text string. (6) You can now experiment with the data in the eActivity window. • The basic operation[...]

  • Seite 742

    20060301 Example 4: Dragging data from eActivity to the Spreadsheet window 13-5-4 Using the Spreadsheet Application with the eActivity Application[...]

  • Seite 743

    20060301 13-6-1 Using the Action Menu 13-6 Using the Action Menu Most of the functions that are available from the [Action] menu are similar to those on the [List-Calculation] sub-menu of the standard [Action] menu. Spreadsheet [Action] Menu Basics The followin g examp le demon strates the bas ic proc edure fo r using functio ns with in the [ Actio[...]

  • Seite 744

    20060301 u ClassP ad Operation (1) With the stylus, tap the cell where you want the result to appear. • In this example, we would tap cell A1. (2) On the [Action] menu, tap [List-Calculation] and then [sum] on the sub-menu. • This inputs the sum function ([s um(]) into the edit box. 13-6-2 Using the Action Menu (3) Use the stylus to drag across[...]

  • Seite 745

    20060301 (4) Tap the s button to the right of the edit box. • This automatically closes the parentheses, calculates the sum of the values in the selected range, and displays the result in cell A1. • You could skip this step and input the closing parentheses by pressing the ) key on the keypad, if you want. 13-6-3 Using the Action Menu (5) Tap t[...]

  • Seite 746

    20060301 13-6-4 Using the Action Menu Action Menu Functions This section describes how to use each function in the [Action] menu. Please note that start cell:end cell is equivalent to entering a list. u ro w Function: Returns the row number of a specified cell. Syntax: row(cell) Example: To determine the row number of cell A7 and input the result [...]

  • Seite 747

    20060301 13-6-5 Using the Action Menu u count Function: Returns a count of the number of cells in the specified range. Syntax: count(start cell[:end cell]) Example: To count the number of cells in the block whose upper left corner is located at A7 a nd who se low er rig ht cor ner is locat ed at C12, a nd inp ut the resul t in c ell A1 :[...]

  • Seite 748

    20060301 13-6-6 Using the Action Menu (=cellif(A > 5,"Big","Small")) u cellif Function: Evalua tes an equ ality or i nequality, and retur ns one of three diff erent expr essions based on whether the equal ity/inequa lity is tr ue (expres sion 1), f alse (expr ession 2), or inconclus ive (expre ssion 3). With this function, th[...]

  • Seite 749

    20060301 13-6-7 Using the Action Menu u min Function: Returns the lowest value contained in the range of specified cells. Syntax: min(start cell[:end cell][,start cell[:end cell]] / [,value]) Exam ple: To determine the lowest value in the block whose upper left corner is located at A7 and whose lower right corner is located at C12, and input the r[...]

  • Seite 750

    20060301 13-6-8 Using the Action Menu u median Function: Returns the median of the values contained in the range of specified cells. Syntax: median(start cell:end cell[,start cell:end cell]) Example: To determine the median of the values in the block whose upper left corner is located at A7 and whose lower right corner is l ocated at C12, and inpu[...]

  • Seite 751

    20060301 13-6-9 Using the Action Menu u Q 1 Function: Returns the first quartile of the values contained in the range of specified cells. Syntax: Q 1 (start cell:end cell[,start cell:end cell]) Example: To determine the first quartile of the values in the block whose upper left corner is located at A7 and whose lower right corner is located at C[...]

  • Seite 752

    20060301 13-6-10 Using the Action Menu u Q 3 Function: Returns the third quartile of the values contained in the range of specified cells. Syntax: Q 3 (start cell:end cell[,start cell:end cell]) Example: To determine the third quartile of the values in the block whose upper left corner is located at A7 and whose lower right corner is located at C1[...]

  • Seite 753

    20060301 13-6-11 Using the Action Menu u List-Calculation - stdDev Function: Returns the sample standard deviation of the values contained in the range of specified cells. Syntax: stdDev(start cell:end cell) Example: To determine the sample standard deviation of the values in the block whose upper left corner is located at A7 and whose lower right[...]

  • Seite 754

    20060301 13-6-12 Using the Action Menu u List-Calculation - sum Function: Returns the sum of the values contained in the range of specified cells. Syntax: sum(start cell:end cell[,start cell:end cell]) Example: To determine the sum of the values in the block whose upper left corner is located at A7 and whose lower right corner is l ocated at C12, [...]

  • Seite 755

    20060301 13-6-13 Using the Action Menu u List-Calculation - cuml Function: Returns the cumulative sums of the values contained in the range of specified cells. Syntax: cuml(start cell:end cell) Example: To determine the cumulative sums of the values in cells B1 through B3, and input the result in cell A1: u List-Calculation - A list Function: Retu[...]

  • Seite 756

    20060301 13-6-14 Using the Action Menu u List-Calculation - percent Function: Returns the percentage of each value in the range of specified cells, the sum of which is 100%. Syntax: percent(start cell:end cell) Example: To determine the percentage of the values in cells B1 through B4, and input the result in cell A1: u List-Calculation - polyEv al[...]

  • Seite 757

    20060301 13-6-15 Using the Action Menu u List-Calculation - sequence Function: Returns the lowest-degree polynomial that generates the sequence expressed by the values in a list or range of specified cells. If we evaluate the polynomial at 2, for example, the result will be the second value in our list. Syntax: sequence(start cell:end cell[,start [...]

  • Seite 758

    20060301 13-6-16 Using the Action Menu • “ x ” is the default variable when you do not specify one above. u List-Calculation - sumSeq Function: Determines the lowest-degree polynomial that generates the sum of the first n terms of your sequence. If we evaluate the resulting polynomial at 1, for example, the result will be the first value in[...]

  • Seite 759

    20060301 13-7-1 Formatting Cells and Data 13-7 Formatting Cells and Data This section explains how to control the format of the spreadsheet and the data contained in the cells. Standard (Fractional) and Decimal (Appr oximate) Modes You can use the following procedure to control whether a specific cell, row, or column, or the entire spreadsheet sho[...]

  • Seite 760

    20060301 T e xt Alignment With the following procedure, you can specify justified, align left, center, or align right for a specific cell, row, or column, or the entire spreadsheet. u ClassP ad Operation (1) Select the cell(s) whose alignment setting you want to specify. • See “Selecting Cells” on page 13-3-5 for information about select[...]

  • Seite 761

    20060301 Changing the Width of a Column There are three different method s you can use to control the width of a column: dragging wit h the stylus, using the [Column Width] command, or using the [AutoFit Selection] command. u T o change the width of a column using the stylus Use the stylus to drag the edge of a column header left or right until it [...]

  • Seite 762

    20060301 (3) On the dialog box that appears, enter a value in the [Width] box to specify the desired width of the column in pixels. • You can also use the [Range] box to specify a different column from the one you selected in step (1) above, or a range of columns. Entering B1:D1 in the [Range] box, for example, will change columns B, C, and D to [...]

  • Seite 763

    20060301 (3) On the [Edit] menu, tap [AutoFit Selection]. • This causes the column width to be adjusted automatically so the entire value can be displayed. • Note that [AutoFit Selection] also will reduce the width of a column, if applicable. The following shows what happens when [AutoFit Selection] is executed while a cell that contains a sing[...]

  • Seite 764

    20060301 13-8-1 Graphing 13-8 Graphing The Spreadsheet application lets you draw a variety of different graphs for analyzing data. You can combine line and column graphs, and the interactive editing feature lets you change a graph by dragging its points on the display. Graph Menu After selecting data on the spreadsheet, use the [Graph] menu to sele[...]

  • Seite 765

    20060301 u [Graph] - [Line] - [Clustered] ( D ) u [Graph] - [Line] - [Stacked] ( F ) 13-8-2 Graphing[...]

  • Seite 766

    20060301 u [Graph] - [Line] - [100% Stacked] ( G ) u [Graph] - [Column] - [Clustered] ( H ) 13-8-3 Graphing[...]

  • Seite 767

    20060301 u [Graph] - [Column] - [Stacked] ( J ) u [Graph] - [Column] - [100% Stacked] ( K ) 13-8-4 Graphing[...]

  • Seite 768

    20060301 u [Graph] - [Bar] - [Clustered] ( L ) u [Graph] - [Bar] - [Stacked] ( : ) 13-8-5 Graphing[...]

  • Seite 769

    20060301 u [Graph] - [Bar] - [100% Stacked] ( " ) u [Graph] - [Pie] ( Z ) • When you select a pie chart, only the first series (row or column) of the selected data is used. • Tapping any of the sections of a pie graph causes three values to appear at the bottom of the screen: the cell location, a data value for the section, and a percent [...]

  • Seite 770

    20060301 u [Graph] - [Scatter] ( X ) 13-8-7 Graphing • In the case of a scatter graph, the first series (column or row) of selected values is used as the x -values for all plots. The other selected values are used as the y -value for each of the plots. This means if you select four columns of data (like Columns A, B, C, and D), for example, ther[...]

  • Seite 771

    20060301 • Tapping any of the bins of a histogram graph causes three values to appear at the bottom of the screen. The first two values (from the left) indicate the range of the selected bin, while the third value indicates the quantity of the selected bin. • You can specify the bin width after drawing a histogram graph. On the Graph window th[...]

  • Seite 772

    20060301 • Tapping the Q1, Q3, Med, Min, or Max location of a box whisker graph will cause the applicable value to appear at the bottom of the screen. • On the Graph window, checking [Series] - [Show Outliers] displays outliers instead of whiskers on graph. • Dragging a box whisker graph to a cell in the spreadsheet window will create a table[...]

  • Seite 773

    20060301 u [Graph] - [Row Series] Selecting this option treats each row as a set of data. The value in each column is plotted as a vertical axis value. The following shows a graph of the same data as the above example, except this time [Row Series] is selected. u [Graph] - [Column Series] Selecting this option treats each column as a separate set o[...]

  • Seite 774

    20060301 Graph Window Menus and T oolbar The following describes the special menus and toolbar that appears whenever the Spreadsheet application Graph window is on the display. k O Menu • See “Using the O Menu” on page 1-5-4. k Edit Menu • See “Edit Menu” on page 13-2-2. k View Menu Many of the [View] menu commands can also be executed [...]

  • Seite 775

    20060301 k T ype Menu • The [Type] menu is identical to the [Graph] menu described on page 13-8-1. k Series Menu All of the [Series] menu commands can also be executed by tapping a Graph window toolbar button. • All of the [Series] menu operations are available only when there is a clustered line graph or a clustered column graph on the Graph w[...]

  • Seite 776

    20060301 Basic Graphing Steps The following are the basic steps for graphing spreadsheet data. u ClassPad Operation (1) Input the data you want to graph into the spreadsheet. (2) Use the [Graph] menu to specify whether you want to graph the data by row or by column. T o do this: Select this [Graph] men u option: Graph the data by row Row Series Gra[...]

  • Seite 777

    20060301 (4) On the [Graph] menu, select the type of graph you want to draw. Or you can tap the applicable icon on the toolbar. • This draws the selected graph. See “Graph Menu” on page 13-8-1 for examples of the different types of graphs that are available. • You can change to another type of graph at any time by selecting the graph type y[...]

  • Seite 778

    20060301 Other Graph Window Operations This section provides more details about the types of operations you can perform while the Graph window is on the display. u T o show or hide lines and marker s (1) While a line graph or a scatter graph is on the Graph window, tap the [View] menu. (2) Tap the [Markers] or [Lines] item to toggle it between show[...]

  • Seite 779

    20060301 u T o change a line in a clustered line graph to a column graph (1) Draw the clustered line graph. (2) With the stylus, tap any data point on the line you wish to change to a column graph. (3) On the [Series] menu, tap [Column]. 13-8-16 Graphing • You could also tap the down arrow button next to the third tool button from the left, and t[...]

  • Seite 780

    20060301 u T o change a column in a clustered column graph to a line (1) Draw the clustered column graph. (2) With the stylus, tap any one of the columns you wish to change to a line graph. (3) On the [Series] menu, tap [Line]. • You could also tap the down arrow button next to the third tool button from the left, and then tap z . • You can cha[...]

  • Seite 781

    20060301 u T o display a regression curve (1) Draw a clustered line graph or clustered column graph. • A regression curve can be drawn for a line, column, or scatter graph only. • The above shows a stacked line graph. (2) With the stylus, tap any point of the data for which you want to draw the regression curve. (3) Use the [Series] menu to sel[...]

  • Seite 782

    20060301 • Tapping the regression curve selects it and displays its equation in the status bar. • You can drag and drop the regression curve to a cell or the edit box in the Spreadsheet window. 13-8-19 Graphing • To delete all displayed regression curves, select [Clear All] on the [Edit] menu. • Note that regression curves are also deleted [...]

  • Seite 783

    20060301 13-8-20 Graphing u T o find out the percenta g e of data for each pie graph section (1) While the display is split between the pie graph and the Spreadsheet windows, tap the pie graph to select it. (2) On the [Edit] menu, tap [Copy]. (3) Tap the Spreadsheet window to make it active. (4) Tap the cell where you want to paste the data. • T[...]

  • Seite 784

    20060301 u T o change the appearance of the axes While a graph is on the Graph window, select [Toggle Axes] on the [View] menu or tap the q toolbar button to cycle through axes settings in the following sequence: axes on → axes and values on → axes and values off → . u T o change the appearance of a graph by dra gging a point While a graph is[...]

  • Seite 785

    20060301 13-8-22 Graphing • If a regression curve is displayed for the data whose graph is being changed by dragging, the regression curve also changes automatically in accordance with the drag changes. • When you edit data in the spreadsheet and press E , your graph will update automatically. Important! • You can drag a point only if it corr[...]

  • Seite 786

    20060301 Chapter 1 4 Using the Differential Equation Graph Application This chapter explains how to use the Differential Equation Graph application, which you can use to investigate families of solutions to ordinary differential equations (ODE). 14-1 Differential Equation Graph Application Overview 14-2 Graphing a First Order Diff erential Equation[...]

  • Seite 787

    20060301 14-1-1 Differential Equation Gr aph Application Overview 14-1 Differential Equation Graph Application Overview This section explains how to use the Differential Equation Graph application screen, and describes the basic configuration of the Differential Equation Graph application windows. Differential Equation Graph Application Features Y[...]

  • Seite 788

    20060301 14-1-2 Differential Equation Gr aph Application Overview Differential Equation Graph Application Window The Differential Equation Graph application has two windows, which are described below. Differential Equation Editor window Use this window to input expressions and initial conditions for graphing. Differential Equation Graph window This[...]

  • Seite 789

    20060301 14-1-3 Differential Equation Gr aph Application Overview k Differential Equation Editor Window Screens The Differential Equation Editor window has three different editor screens. The editor screen you should use depends on what you want to input, as described below. T o input this: T ap this tab: T o displa y this editor screen: Differenti[...]

  • Seite 790

    20060301 14-1-4 Differential Equation Gr aph Application Overview Differential Equation Editor Window Menus and Buttons This section provides basic information about Differential Equation Editor window menus and commands. • For information about the O menu, see “Using the O Menu” on page 1-5-4. Edit Menu ([DiffEq], [IC], [Graphs]) T o do this[...]

  • Seite 791

    20060301 14-1-5 Differential Equation Gr aph Application Overview T oolbar Buttons ([DiffEq], [IC], [Graphs]) T o do this: T ap this button: Graph the selected function(s) O Display the View Window dialog box to configure Differential Equation Graph window settings 6 Display the Main application window ~ Delete the line of data at the current curs[...]

  • Seite 792

    20060301 14-1-6 Differential Equation Gr aph Application Overview Differential Equation Graph Window Menus and Buttons This section provides basic information about Differential Equation Graph window menus and commands. Edit Menu T o do this: Select this Edit menu item: Toggle arrows to indicate the direction of slope field or phase plane vectors [...]

  • Seite 793

    20060301 14-1-7 Differential Equation Gr aph Application Overview Analysis Menu T o do this: Select this Analysis menu item: Pan the graph window Pan Select and move initial condition point Select Trace the graph of a solution curve Trace Register the coordinates at the location you tap on the Differential Equation Graph window as the initial condi[...]

  • Seite 794

    20060301 14-1-8 Differential Equation Gr aph Application Overview Differential Equation Graph Application Status Bar The status bar at the bottom of the Differential Equation Graph application shows the current angle unit setting and [Complex Format] setting (page 1-9-5). Rad Deg Cplx Real The angle unit setting is radians. The angle unit setting i[...]

  • Seite 795

    20060301 14-2-1 Graphing a First Order Diff erential Equation 14-2 Graphing a First Ord er Diff erential Eq uation This section explains how to input a first order differential equation and draw a slope field, and how to graph the solution curve(s) of a first order differential equation based on given initial conditions. Inputting a First Or der[...]

  • Seite 796

    20060301 14-2-2 Graphing a First Order Diff erential Equation (5) Tap O . • This draws the slope field of y ’ = y 2 – x . (6) Tap 6 , or tap O and then tap [View Window] to display the View Window dialog box, and configure the View Window settings as shown below. • For details about View Window settings, see “Configuring Differential Equ[...]

  • Seite 797

    20060301 14-2-3 Graphing a First Order Diff erential Equation Inputting Initial Conditions and Graphing the Solution Curves of a First Order Diff erential Equation You can use the procedure in this section to overlay, onto the slope field, solution curves of the first order differential equation input on the [DiffEq] tab for given initial conditi[...]

  • Seite 798

    20060301 14-2-4 Graphing a First Order Diff erential Equation Configuring Solution Curve Graph Settings You can specify whether or not a solution curve should be drawn for each initial condition input on the initial condition editor. You can also specify either a normal or thick line for solution curves. u T o configure the solution curve draw se[...]

  • Seite 799

    20060301 14-2-5 Graphing a First Order Diff erential Equation (2) Tap the down arrow button on the toolbar. (3) Tap F on the toolbar to draw the solution curve with a thin line, or G to draw with a thick line. (4) To apply your setting to the graph, tap O .[...]

  • Seite 800

    20060301 14-3-1 Graphing a Second Order Diff erential Equation 14-3 Graphing a Second Order Diff erential Equation This section explains how to input a second order differential equation and draw a slope field, and how to graph the solution curve(s) for a second order differential equation based on given initial conditions. With this application, [...]

  • Seite 801

    20060301 14-3-2 Graphing a Second Order Diff erential Equation (4) Tap O . • This draws the phase plane of x ’ = x , y ’ = − y . Inputting Initial Conditions and Graphing the Solution Curve of a Second Order Diff erential Equation You can use the procedure in this section to overlay, onto the slope field, solution curve of the second order[...]

  • Seite 802

    20060301 14-3-3 Graphing a Second Order Diff erential Equation (4) Tap O . • This graphs the solution curve and overlays it on the phase plane of { x ’ = x , y ’ = − y }. r [Edit] - [Redraw] Tip • You can also draw a solution curve using [Modify] in the Analysis menu (page 14-1-7).[...]

  • Seite 803

    20060301 14-4-1 Graphing an Nth-order Diff erential Equation 14-4 Graphing an Nth- ord er Diff erentia l Equati on This section explains how to graph the solution curve(s) for an nth order (higher order) differential equation based on specified initial conditions. With this application, an nth order differential equation is input in the form of a [...]

  • Seite 804

    20060301 14-4-2 Graphing an Nth-order Diff erential Equation (5) Use the initial condition editor to input ( xi , y 1 i , y 2 i ) = (0, −1, 0), (0, 0, 0), (0, 1, 0). a w y b w a w a w a w a w a w b w a w (6) Tap O . (Tapping r on this screen will cause the initial condition editor to fill the entire window.) r [Edit] - [Redraw][...]

  • Seite 805

    20060301 14-5-1 Drawing f ( x ) T ype Function Graphs and P arametric Function Graphs 14-5 Drawing f ( x ) T ype Function Graphs and P arametric Function Graphs You can use the Differential Equation Graph application to graph f ( x ) type function graphs and parametric function graphs, the same way as you do with the Graph & Table application. [...]

  • Seite 806

    20060301 14-5-2 Drawing f ( x ) T ype Function Graphs and P arametric Function Graphs Drawing a P arametric Function Graph Example: To graph { xt = 3sin( t ) + 1, yt = 3cos( t ) + 1} and { xt = sin( t ) − 1, yt = cos( t ) − 1} (Angle Unit Setting: radian, 0 < t < 2 π ) u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap the [Graphs] tab to display the general [...]

  • Seite 807

    20060301 14-6-1 Configuring Differential Equation Graph Vie w Window P arameters 14-6 Configuring Differential Equation Graph View Windo w Parameter s You can set the x - and y -axis window settings, as well as a number of other general graphing parameters on the View Window dialog box. This dialog box contains two tabs. The first tab lets you s[...]

  • Seite 808

    20060301 14-6-2 Configuring Differential Equation Graph Vie w Window P arameters Differential Equation Graph View Window P arameters k Window T ab Setting Description x min minimum value along the (horizontal) x -axis x max maximum value along the (horizontal) x -axis y min minimum value along the (vertical) y -axis y max maximum value along the ([...]

  • Seite 809

    20060301 14-6-3 Configuring Differential Equation Graph Vie w Window P arameters k Solutions T ab Setting Description Solution Dir. A solution curve is graphed starting at the initial condition value t 0 and continues until it reaches a target value, which can be either t min or t max. The solution direction determines the target values. Forward w[...]

  • Seite 810

    20060301 14-7-1 Differential Equation Gr aph Windo w Operations 14-7 Differential Equation Graph Window Operations You can perform the following operations on the Differential Equation Graph window. • Graph zooming and scrolling • Modification of initial conditions (shifting the initial condition coordinates by dragging it) • Configuring ne[...]

  • Seite 811

    20060301 14-7-2 Differential Equation Gr aph Windo w Operations (1) Perform the operation under “Inputting an Nth-order Differential Equation and Initial Conditions, and then Graphing the Solutions” on page 14-4-1. • Performing all of the steps will produce a graph like the one shown below to appear on the Differential Equation Graph window. [...]

  • Seite 812

    20060301 14-7-3 Differential Equation Gr aph Windo w Operations u T o configure new initial conditions on the Differential Equation Graph window Example: After drawing the slope field of a first order differential equation, to configure initial condition settings on the Differential Equation Graph window (1) Perform the operation under “Inputt[...]

  • Seite 813

    20060301 14-7-4 Differential Equation Gr aph Windo w Operations The procedure for modifying the initial condition is the same as steps 3 and 4 under “To modify an initial condition on the Differential Equation Graph window” on page 14-7-1. • The newly configured initial condition is added to the initial condition editor. To view it, tap the [...]

  • Seite 814

    20060301 14-7-5 Differential Equation Gr aph Windo w Operations u T o start a field trace (1) Draw a slope field or a phase plane. • See sections 14-2 and 14-3 for information about drawing a slope field or phase plane. (2) Tap L . • This will cause the L button to become highlighted, and will display a crosshair pointer ( ) near field line i[...]

  • Seite 815

    20060301 14-7-6 Differential Equation Gr aph Windo w Operations u T o perf orm a graph/cur ve trace operation (1) Draw a solution curve or general graph. • See sections 14-2 through 14-5 for information about drawing. (2) Tap = or [Analysis] - [Trace]. • This will cause the = button to become highlighted, and will display a crosshair pointer ( [...]

  • Seite 816

    20060301 14-7-7 Differential Equation Gr aph Windo w Operations (3) From the eActivity application menu, tap [Insert], [Strip], and then [DiffEqGraph]. • This inserts a Differential Equation Graph data strip, and displays the Differential Equation Graph window in the lower half of the screen. u T o graph the slope field and solution curves by dr[...]

  • Seite 817

    20060301 14-7-8 Differential Equation Gr aph Windo w Operations (6) Drag the stylus across “[0,1]” on the eActivity application window to select it. (7) Drag the selected matrix to the Differential Equation Graph window. • This graphs the solution curves of y ’ = exp( x ) + x 2 in accordance with the initial condition defined by the matrix [...]

  • Seite 818

    20060301 14-7-9 Differential Equation Gr aph Windo w Operations u T o graph the solution curves by dr opping an Nth-order differential equation and matrix into the Differential Equation Graph window Example: To drag the Nth-order differential equation y ” + y ’ = exp( x ) and then the initial condition matrix [[0, 1, 0][0, 2, 0]] from the eActi[...]

  • Seite 819

    20060301 (5) Drag the selected expression to the Differential Equation Graph window. • This registers y ” + y ’ = exp( x ) on the differential equation editor ([DiffEq] tab). The Differential Equation Graph window contents do not change at this time. (6) Drag the stylus across “[[0,1,0][0,2,0]]” on the eActivity application window to sele[...]

  • Seite 820

    20060301 Chapter 1 5 Using the Financial Application This chapter explains how to use the Financial application. You can use the Financial application to perform a variety of financial calculations. 15-1 Financial Application Overview 15-2 Simple Interest 15-3 Compound Interest 15-4 Cash Flow 15-5 Amor tization 15-6 Interest Con version 15-7 Cost/[...]

  • Seite 821

    20060301 15-1-1 Financial Application Overview 15-1 Financial Application Overview This section explains how to use the Financial application initial screen, and describes the basic configuration of the Financial application windows. It also provides information on using the Financial application’s Help and Format features. Starting Up the Finan[...]

  • Seite 822

    20060301 Financial Application Menus and Buttons This section describes the basic configuration of Financial application windows, and provides basic information about its menus and commands. • For information about the O menu, see “Using the O Menu” on page 1-5-4. k Edit Menu T o do this: Select this Ed it menu item: Cut the currently select[...]

  • Seite 823

    20060301 T o perf orm this type of calculation: Select this Calculations menu item: Amount that a business expense can be offset by income (depreciated) over a given year Depreciation Purchase price or annual yield of a bond Bond Calculation Amount you must sell to break even or to obtain a specified profit, as well as amount of profit or loss o[...]

  • Seite 824

    20060301 Configuring Default Financial Application Settings Most financial calculations require that you define certain general parameters that affect the results they produce. For example, you need to specify whether you use a 360-day or 365-day year, whether payments are made at the beginning of a period or end of a period, whether interest is[...]

  • Seite 825

    20070301 Financial Application P ages Selecting a calculation type from the Financial application [ Calculations ] menu will create and display a new “page”. Note the following rules that apply to Financial application pages. • You can scroll between pages using the toolbar < and > buttons. • Selecting the same calculation type as the[...]

  • Seite 826

    20060301 • While the cursor is located in a calculation box, you can press the calculator’s E key to perform the calculation instead of tapping the button next to the box. Alternatively, you can tap “Solve” in the status bar to perform the calculation. k Help T ab Tapping the [Help] tab at the bottom of a financial calculation screen will [...]

  • Seite 827

    20060301 15-1-7 Financial Application Overview k Status Bar The status bar shows the settings that apply to the calculations on the currently active page. You can change the settings by tapping them on the status bar. If the cursor is in an input/calculation box, “Solve” will appear on the left side of the status bar. You can tap this to comple[...]

  • Seite 828

    20060301 15-2 Simple Interest Simple Interest lets you calculate interest (without compounding) based on the number of days money is invested. Simple Interest Fields The following fields appear on the Simple Interest calculation page. Field Description Days Number of days in investment period I % Annual interest rate (as a percent) PV Present valu[...]

  • Seite 829

    20060301 k Example 2 What is the simple interest ([SI]) on a principal amount of $10,000 (PV) invested or borrowed for 120 days (Days) at 5% per annum ( I %)? • This indicates that the simple interest is $164.3835616. Calculation Formulas 365-day Mode SI' = Dys 365 × PV × i I % 100 i = 360-day Mode SI' = Dys 360 × PV × i I % 100 i =[...]

  • Seite 830

    20060301 15-3 Compound Interest Compound Interest lets you calculate interest based on compounding parameters you specify. Compound Interest Fields The following fields appear on the Compound Interest calculation page. Field Description N Number of installment periods I % Annual interest rate (as a percent) PV Present value (initial investment) PM[...]

  • Seite 831

    20060301 15-3-2 Compound Interest k Example 3 What will be the value of an ordinary annuity at the end of 10 years if $100 is deposited each month into an account that earns 7% compounded monthly? k Example 2 If you deposit $100 into an account that earns 7% compounded monthly, how much will be in the account after three years?[...]

  • Seite 832

    20060301 15-3-3 Compound Interest Calculation Formulas u PV , PMT , FV , n I % G 0 I % = 0 PV = – ( PMT × n + FV ) FV = – ( PMT × n + PV ) PV = – × PMT – × F V β γ α PMT = – × PV – × F V β α γ FV = – × PV – × PMT β γ α n = log (1+ iS ) × PMT – FV × i (1+ iS ) × PMT + PV × i { } log (1+ i ) PMT = – n PV + FV [...]

  • Seite 833

    20060301 15-4-1 Cash Flow 15-4 Cash Flo w Cash Flow lets you calculate the value of money paid out or received in varying amounts over time. Cash Flow Fields The following fields appear on the Cash Flow calculation page. Field Description Cash List of income or expenses (up to 80 entries) I % Annual interest rate (as a percent) NPV Net present val[...]

  • Seite 834

    20060301 (4) On the dialog box that appears, make sure “list1” is selected for “List variables”, and then tap [OK]. • You can now use the list of values in cash flow calculation. • To close the Stat Editor window, tap anywhere in the Stat Editor window and then tap the close box ( S ) in the upper right corner of the screen. • For de[...]

  • Seite 835

    20060301 k Example 2 Suppose you were offered the investment in Example 1 at a cost of $1,000. What is the net present value (NPV) of the investment? What is the internal rate of return (IRR)? Note • When performing the calculations for Example 2, you need to enter the cost, as a negative value (–1000), in cell 1 of list1 in the stat editor. Af[...]

  • Seite 836

    20060301 u IRR IRR is calculated using Newton’s Method. In this formula, NPV = 0, and the value of IRR is equivalent to i × 100. It should be noted, however, that minute fractional values tend to accumulate during the subsequent calculations performed automatically by the calculator, so NPV never actually reaches exactly zero. IRR becomes [...]

  • Seite 837

    20060301 15-5-1 Amor tization 15-5 Amortization Amortization lets you calculate the interest and principal portions of a payment or payments. Amortization Fields The following fields appear on the Amortization calculation page. Field Description PM1 Number of first installment period in interval under consideration PM2 Number of last installment [...]

  • Seite 838

    20060301 k Example 1 (Compound Interest) Use a Compound Interest page (page 15-3-1) to determine the monthly payment ([PMT]) on a 20-year (N = 20 × 12 = 240) mortgage with a loan amount (PV) of $100,000 at an annual rate ( I %) of 8.025%, compounded monthly (C/Y = 12). There are 12 payment periods per year (P/Y). Be sure to input zero for the futu[...]

  • Seite 839

    20060301 15-5-3 Amor tization k Example 2 (Amortization) Use the monthly payment value you obtained in Example 1 (PMT = –837.9966279) to determine the following information for payment 10 (PM1) through 15 (PM2). As in Example 1, the mortgage has a loan amount (PV) of $100,000 at an annual rate ( I %) of 8.025%, compounded monthly (C/Y = 12) for 2[...]

  • Seite 840

    20060301 15-5-4 Amor tization I%' = I% (1+ ) –1 [ C / Y ] [ P / Y ] 100 × [ C / Y ] { } × 100 i = I%' ÷ 100 Calculation Formulas a : Interest portion of payment PM1 (INT) b : Principal portion of payment PM1 (PRN) c : Principal balance upon completion of payment PM2 (BAL) d : Total principal paid from payment PM1 to payment PM2 ( Σ [...]

  • Seite 841

    20060301 15-6-1 Interest Conv ersion 15-6 Interest Con ver sion Interest Conversion lets you calculate the effective or nominal interest rate for interest that is compounded multiple times during a year. Interest Con version Fields The following fields appear on the Interest Conversion calculation page. Field Description N Number of times interest[...]

  • Seite 842

    20060301 Tip • You can change any value and then tap a button to recalculate. Calculation Formulas EFF = n APR/ 100 1+ –1 × 100 n APR = 100 EFF 1+ –1 × n × 100 1 n 15-6-2 Interest Conv ersion k Example 2 What is the nominal interest rate ([APR]) on a certificate that offers an annual effective interest rate ([EFF]) of 5%, compounded bi-mo[...]

  • Seite 843

    20060301 15-7-1 Cost /Sell/Margin 15-7 Cost /Sell/Margin Cost /Sell/Margin lets you calculate the cost, selling price, or margin of profit on an item, given the other two values. Cost /Sell/Margin Fields The following fields appear on the Cost /Sell/Margin calculation page. Field Description Cost Production cost Sell Selling price Margin Margin o[...]

  • Seite 844

    20060301 15-8-1 Day Count 15-8 Da y Count Day Count lets you calculate the number of days between two dates, or the date that is a specified number of days from another date. Day Count Fields The following fields appear on the Day Count calculation page. Field Description d1 Month (1-12); Day (1-31); Year (1902-2097) d2 Month (1-12); Day (1-31); [...]

  • Seite 845

    20060301 k Example 3 What date (d1) comes 44 days ([Days]) before March 3, 2005 (d2)? 15-8-2 Day Count k Example 2 What date (d2) comes 150 days ([Days]) after June 11, 2005 (d1)?[...]

  • Seite 846

    20060301 15-9-1 Depreciation 15-9 Depreciation Depreciation lets you calculate the amount that a business expense can be offset by income (depreciated) over a given year. You can use a Depreciation page to calculate depreciation using one of four methods: straight-line, fixed-percentage, sum-of-the-years’-digits, or declining-balance. Depreciati[...]

  • Seite 847

    20060301 15-9-2 Depreciation Tip • At the end of the useful life the value of the computer will be 0, so we enter 0 in the FV field. k Example 1 Use the sum-of-the-years’-digits method ([SYD]) to calculate the first year ( j = 1) of depreciation on an $12,000 (PV) computer, with a useful life (N) of five years. Use a depreciation ratio ( I %[...]

  • Seite 848

    20060301 k Example 2 Now calculate the depreciation amount ([SYD]) for the second year ( j = 2). Note • You can also tap [SL] to calculate depreciation using straight-line method, [FP] using fixed- percentage method, or [DB] using declining-balance method. • Each depreciation method will produce a different residual value after depreciation (R[...]

  • Seite 849

    20060301 k Fixed-P ercentage Method k Sum-of-the-Y ear s’-Digits Method k Declining-Balance Method 100 I% FP j = ( RDV j –1 + FV ) × 100 YR 1 I% FP 1 = PV × 12 × FP n +1 = RDV n ( YR 1 G 12) RDV 1 = PV – FV – FP 1 RDV j = RDV j –1 – FP j RDV n +1 = 0 ( YR 1 G 12) 12 YR 1 n' = n – n ( n + 1) Z = 2 2 ( In tg ( n' ) +1) ( In[...]

  • Seite 850

    20060301 15-10-1 Bond Calculation 15-10 Bond Calculation Bond Calculation lets you calculate the purchase price or the annual yield of a bond. Bond Calculation Fields The following fields appear on the Bond Calculation page. Field Description d1 Month (1-12); Day (1-31); Year (1902-2097) d2 Month (1-12); Day (1-31); Year (1902-2097) N Number of pe[...]

  • Seite 851

    20060301 15-10-2 Bond Calculation k Example 1 You want to purchase a semiannual (Compounding Frequency = Semi-annual) corporate bond that matures on 12/15/2006 (d2) to settle on 6/1/2004 (d1). The bond is based on the 30/360 day-count method (Days in Year = 360 days) with a coupon rate (CPN) of 3%. The bond will be redeemed at 100% of its par value[...]

  • Seite 852

    20060301 15-10-3 Bond Calculation k Example 2 For the same type of bond described in Example 1, calculate the price on the bond (PRC) based on a specific number of coupon payments (Term). • Before performing the calculation, you should use the [Format] tab to change the [Bond Interval] setting to “Term”, or tap “Date” in the status bar. [...]

  • Seite 853

    20060301 PRC : price per $100 of face value CPN : coupon rate (%) YLD : annual yield (%) A : accrued days M : number of coupon payments per year (1 = Annual, 2 = Semi-annual) N : number of coupon payments until maturity ( n is used when “Term” is specified for [Bond Interval] in the [Format] tab.) RDV : redemption price per $100 of face value [...]

  • Seite 854

    20060301 Bond Interval Setting: Term u Annual Yield (YLD) YLD is calculated using Newton’s Method. Note • The Financial application performs annual yield (YLD) calculations using Newton’s Method, which produces approximate values whose precision can be affected by various calculation conditions. Because of this, annual yield calculation resul[...]

  • Seite 855

    20060301 15-11-1 Break-Even P oint 15-11 Break-Even P oint Break-Even Point lets you calculate the amount you must sell to break even or to obtain a specified profit, as well as the profit or loss on particular sales. Break-Even P oint Fields The following fields appear on the Break-Even Point calculation page. Field Description PRC Selling pri[...]

  • Seite 856

    20060301 15-11-2 Break-Even P oint k Example 1 What is the break-even point sales amount ([SBE]) and sales quantity ([QBE]) required for a profit ([PRF]) of $400,000? Note • You need to calculate the break-even point sales quantity ([QBE]) before you will be able to calculate the break-even sales amount ([SBE]).[...]

  • Seite 857

    20060301 k Example 2 What is the break-even point sales amount ([SBE]) and sales quantity ([QBE]) to attain a profit ratio ([r%]) of 40%? • For this example, use the [Format] tab to change the [Profit Amount/Ratio] setting to “Ratio ( r %)” or tap “PRF” in the status bar to change it to “ r %”. Calculation Formulas u Profit (Pr o?[...]

  • Seite 858

    20060301 15-12-1 Margin of Safety 15-12 Margin of Saf ety Margin of Safety lets you calculate how much sales can be reduced before losses are incurred. Margin of Safety Fields The following fields appear on the Margin of Safety calculation page. Field Description SAL Amount obtained from sales SBE Break-even sales (amount that must be obtained fro[...]

  • Seite 859

    20060301 15-13-1 Operating Le verage 15-13 Operating Levera g e Operating leverage lets you calculate the degree of change in net earnings arising from a change in sales amount. Operating Leverage Fields The following fields appear on the Operating Leverage calculation page. Field Description SAL Amount currently obtained from sales VC Variable co[...]

  • Seite 860

    20060301 15-14-1 Financial Lev erage 15-14 Financial Levera g e Financial Leverage lets you calculate the degree of change in net earnings arising from a change in interest paid. Financial Leverage Fields The following fields appear on the Financial Leverage calculation page. Field Description EBIT Earnings before interest and taxes INT Interest t[...]

  • Seite 861

    20060301 15-15-1 Combined Lev erage 15-15 Combined Levera g e Combined Leverage lets you calculate the combined effects of operation and financial leverages. Combined Leverage Fields The following fields appear on the Combined Leverage calculation page. Field Description SAL Amount obtained from sales VC Variable cost for this level of production[...]

  • Seite 862

    20060301 15-16-1 Quantity Conv ersion 15-16 Quantity Con ver sion Quantity Conversion lets you calculate the number of items sold, selling price, or sales amount given the other two values. It also lets you calculate the number of items manufactured, unit variable cost, or total variable cost given the other two values. Quantity Con version Fields [...]

  • Seite 863

    20060301 15-16-2 Quantity Conv ersion • You can also calculate the variable cost per unit ([VCU]) or number of units manufactured ([QTY]) by inputting the other two values and tapping the button for the result you want. Calculation Formulas k Example 2 Calculate the total variable costs of production (Manufacturing: [VC]) when the variable cost p[...]

  • Seite 864

    20060301 Chapter 1 6 Configuring System Settings The ClassPad unit’s System application lets you configure global system settings and access system information. 16-1 System Setting Overview 16-2 Managing Memory Usage 16-3 Using the Reset Dialog Box 16-4 Initializing Y our ClassP ad 16-5 Adjusting Display Contrast 16-6 Configuring P ower Proper[...]

  • Seite 865

    20060301 16-1-1 System Setting Overview 16-1 System Setting Overview This section describes the configuration of the System application window, and provides information about its menus and commands. Starting Up the System Application Use the following procedure to start up the System application. u ClassPad Operation On the application menu, tap Y[...]

  • Seite 866

    20060301 System Application Menus and Buttons To perform an operation in the System application, select it on the [System] menu or tap the applicable toolbar button. T o do this: T ap this button: Or select this System menu item: Reset the ClassPad unit (which deletes all variable and program data in main memory and all eActivity data in the storag[...]

  • Seite 867

    20060301 16-2 Managing Memory Usage You can use [Memory Usage] to determine how much data is stored in the main memory and the storage area, and to delete data. [Memory Usage] appears first whenever you tap Y on the application menu to start up the System application. [Memory Usage] contains the following four sheets. T o vie w this: Select this t[...]

  • Seite 868

    20060301 This item: Shows how muc h memor y is used by this type of data: Graph Summary Summary table data View Window 2-dimensional View Window parameter values 3D View Window 3-dimensional View Window parameter values Factor Zoom factor values Table Range values and table result values Conics Eqn Conics expressions Sequence Sequential and recursi[...]

  • Seite 869

    20060301 Deleting Memory Usage Data You can use the following procedure to delete memory usage data. u ClassPad Operation (1) Tap the memory usage tab (Main Memory, Add-In App., eActivity, or Language) that contains the data you want to delete. (2) Select the check box next to the item whose data you want to delete. (3) Tap the [Delete] button. (4)[...]

  • Seite 870

    20060301 16-3 Using the Reset Dialog Bo x You can perform the following operations from the Reset dialog box. • Delete all variable and program data in main memory • Delete all eActivity data in storage memory u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap Y . • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap ; to display the Reset dial[...]

  • Seite 871

    20060301 16-4 Initializing Y our ClassP ad The initialization procedure provides you with a choice of two options. You can either clear the Flash ROM entire and return its data to the factory default state, or you can specify deletion of all user formulas and data, without deleting any currently installed add-in applications. W arning! Initializing[...]

  • Seite 872

    20060301 (3) Adjust display contrast. T o do this: T ap this b utton: Make the display lighter Make the display darker Return contrast to its initial factory default setting Initial • Tapping and holding or continually performs the applicable operation until you release the button. (4) To close the Contrast dialog box, tap [Set]. 16-5 Adjusting D[...]

  • Seite 873

    20060301 16-6 Configuring P o wer Properties Use the Power Properties dialog box to configure the power saving mode and auto power off (APO) settings. P ower Saving Mode Your ClassPad has a “resume” feature that remembers its status when you turn it off, and restores the same status the next time you turn the ClassPad back on. Resume feature [...]

  • Seite 874

    20060301 Configuring P ower Pr oper ties u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap Y . • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap X to display the Power Properties dialog box. (3) Configure the Power Save Mode and Auto Power Off settings. • See “Power Saving Mode” and “Auto Power Off” on page 16-6-1 for details about[...]

  • Seite 875

    20060301 16-7 Specifying the Displa y Language You can use the following procedure to specify German, English, Spanish, French, or Portuguese as the display language. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap Y . • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap C to display the Language dialog box. (3) In the list of languages, tap th[...]

  • Seite 876

    20060301 16-8-1 Specifying the Font Set 16-8 Specifying the Font Set You can select either “Regular” or “Bolder” as the display font type. Regular Bolder Text Input Menu u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap Y . • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap > to display the Font Select dialog box. (3) In the list of [...]

  • Seite 877

    20060301 16-9 Specifying the Alphabetic K eyboar d Arrangement The Keyboard dialog box lets you select from among three different key arrangements for the alphabetic (abc) soft keyboard: QWERTY, AZERTY, or QWERTZ. The initial default setting is QWERTY. QWERTZ u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap Y . • This starts up the System ap[...]

  • Seite 878

    20060301 16-10 Optimizing “Flash R OM” Use the following procedure to perform a “garbage collection” operation that optimizes Flash ROM. Optimizing Flash ROM increases the amount of memory available for storage. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap Y . • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap < . • This displ[...]

  • Seite 879

    20060301 16-11 Specifying the Ending Screen Image Whenever you press the o key to turn off the ClassPad unit, it copies any data currently in RAM to Flash ROM, and then turns off power. The ending screen is what appears on the display while the RAM data save operation is being performed, until power is actually turned off. You can specify the image[...]

  • Seite 880

    20060301 16-12 Adjusting T ouch P anel Alignment You should adjust touch panel alignment whenever you find that the wrong operation or no operation is performed when you tap the ClassPad screen. u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap Y . • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap M to display the touch panel alignment screen[...]

  • Seite 881

    20060301 16-13 Viewing V er sion Inf ormation Use the following procedure when you want to view version information about your ClassPad’s operating system. u T o view software ver sion information (1) On the application menu, tap Y . • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap > to display the Version dialog box. (3) To close the Versio[...]

  • Seite 882

    20060301 u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap Y . • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap [System] and then [ClassPad Name] to display the ClassPad Name dialog box. (3) Enter your name on the dialog box. 16-14 Registering a User Name on a ClassP ad You can register your name on your ClassPad so it appears at the bottom o[...]

  • Seite 883

    20060301 u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap Y . • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap [System] and then [Imaginary Unit] to display the Imaginary Unit dialog box. (3) On the Imaginary Unit dialog box, select the type of imaginary unit you want to use. 16-15 Specifying the Complex Number Imaginary Unit In mathematics,[...]

  • Seite 884

    20060301 u ClassPad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap Y . • This starts up the System application. (2) Tap [System] and then [Shift Keys] to display the Shift Key Assign dialog box. (3) On the Shift Key Assign dialog box, select the “Set ( – ) as shift key” check box. (4) Tap the down arrow button then select the hard key to which [...]

  • Seite 885

    20060301 16-16-2 Assigning Shift Mode K ey Operations to Hard K eys • To assign the Cut, Copy, or Paste operation, tap the applicable button on the dialog box. • To clear the current assignment from the hard key, tap [Clear Assignment]. (6) After all the settings are the way you want, tap [OK] to apply them and close the Shift Key Assign dialog[...]

  • Seite 886

    20060301 P erf orming Data Comm unication You can use the SB-62 data communication cable to connect your ClassPad to another ClassPad unit or to a CASIO Data Analyzer, and transfer data between them. To transfer data between a ClassPad and a personal computer, you need to use the special USB cable that comes with ClassPad. This chapter explains how[...]

  • Seite 887

    20060301 17-1 Data Comm unication Over view This section provides an overview of the types of connections that are possible, and the data that can be transferred over each connection. It also tells you how to use the Communication application to transfer data. 17-1-1 Data Communication Ov er view Important! • Never press the P button on the back [...]

  • Seite 888

    20060301 20070301 17-1-2 Data Communication Ov er view k Connecting a ClassP ad to a Computer You can perform the following operations when connected to a computer. • Transfer variable data and eActivity data between the ClassPad and a computer • Install add-in applications, language data, and operating system upgrades onto your ClassPad from t[...]

  • Seite 889

    20060301 17-1-3 Data Communication Ov er view u How to T ransfer Data Use the “Send38k” and “Receive38k” program commands to transfer data. For details, see “Chapter 12 – Using the Program Application”, and the user documentation that comes with the Data Analyzer. Using the ClassP ad Communication Application To perform a data transfe[...]

  • Seite 890

    20060301 17-2-1 Connecting the ClassP ad to Another Device 17-2 Connecting the ClassP ad to Another Device This section provides detailed explanations about how to connect the ClassPad to another ClassPad unit, to a computer, and to a CASIO Data Analyzer. Connecting to Another ClassP ad Unit Use the procedure below to connect two ClassPad units. k [...]

  • Seite 891

    20060301 17-2-2 Connecting the ClassP ad to Another Device Connecting to an EA-200 Data Analyzer You can use the CASIO Data Analyzer to sample and collect data on various everyday natural phenomena. You can also connect the Data Analyzer to your ClassPad, and control Data Analyzer operation from your ClassPad. You can transfer setup information fro[...]

  • Seite 892

    20060301 20070301 17-2-3 Connecting the ClassP ad to Another Device Connecting to a Computer (USB) By running FA-CP1 software that comes with ClassPad on your computer, you can transfer ClassPad data to your computer. See the FA-CP1 User’s Guide for information about how to use it. • For information about FA-CP1 minimum computer system requirem[...]

  • Seite 893

    20060301 17-3-1 Configuring Communication P arameters 17-3 Configuring Comm unication P arameters Before trying to transfer data with the ClassPad, you should perform the procedures described in this section to configure its data communication parameters. u ClassP ad Operation (1) On the application menu, tap B . • This starts the Communicatio[...]

  • Seite 894

    20060301 17-3-2 Configuring Communication P arameters The above setting specifies the data rate when connected to another ClassPad, or a Data Analyzer. Note that you must set the data rate (baud rate) for both the ClassPad and the connected device so they are identical.  u Wakeup Enable T o do this: T urn on the wakeup function (see below) T u[...]

  • Seite 895

    20060301 20070301 17-3-3 Configuring Communication P arameters k When connected to a computer’ s USB port Wakeup activates as soon as you connect the cable to the ClassPad, and the ClassPad automatically performs the following steps. (1) If the ClassPad is off when the cable is connected, it turns on. (2) The currently running application is exi[...]

  • Seite 896

    20060301 17-4-1 T ransf err ing Data to Another ClassP ad Unit 17-4 T ransferring Data to Another ClassP ad Unit This section details the steps you should perform in order to transfer data from one ClassPad unit to another. u ClassP ad Operation (1) Use the procedure under “Connecting to Another ClassPad Unit” on page 17-2-1 to connect the two [...]

  • Seite 897

    20060301 Sender (6) In response to the confirmation message that appears, tap [OK] to send the data or [Cancel] to cancel the send operation. • Sender Tapping [OK] sends the data you selected in step (4). • Receiver If the receiving device has wakeup enabled, it automatically starts receiving the data. Sender (7) The message “Complete!” ap[...]

  • Seite 898

    20060301 17-4-3 T ransf err ing Data to Another ClassP ad Unit Selecting Data for T ransfer Perform the following steps on the sending device to select the data you want to send in step (3) of the procedure on page 17-4-1. u ClassP ad Operation (1) In the Communication application, tap [Link] and then [Transmit], or tap E to display the Select Data[...]

  • Seite 899

    20060301 17-4-4 T ransf err ing Data to Another ClassP ad Unit • To return to the folder list from a li st of folder contents, tap I in the lower left corner of the window. • You can transfer all of the variables or data in a folder by selecting the check box next to the folder name on the data folder list or eActivity folder list. (4) Tap [OK][...]

  • Seite 900

    20060301 17-4-5 T ransf err ing Data to Another ClassP ad Unit Sending a Screenshot of the Current Display Contents Use the following procedure to send the current display contents of your ClassPad to another ClassPad unit. Important! Screenshot transfer is disabled when either of the following conditions exists. • While a calculation or graphing[...]

  • Seite 901

    20060301 17-4-6 T ransf err ing Data to Another ClassP ad Unit Communication Standb y The ClassPad enters “communication standby” when you perform a send or receive operation. While in communication standby, the ClassPad waits for the other unit to send data, or for it to get ready to receive data. The following describes how communication stan[...]

  • Seite 902

    20060301 Appendix 1  Resetting and Initializing the ClassP ad 2  Deleting an Application 3  P ower Supply 4  Number of Digits and Precision 5  Specifications 6  Character Code  T able 7  System  V ariable  T able 8  Command and Function Index 9  Graph  T ypes and Ex ecutable Functions 1[...]

  • Seite 903

    20060301 1  Resetting and Initializing the ClassP ad  The memory of your ClassPad is divided into three parts: main memory, a storage area for storing data, and a RAM area for executing various calculations and operations. Reset and initialize restore normal ClassPad operation after some problem occurs. RAM Reset  Perform RAM reset [...]

  • Seite 904

    20060301 k   P erforming the RAM Reset Operation  You should perform the RAM reset operation whenever your ClassPad freezes up or when it begins to operate abnormally for some reason. The RAM reset operation should restore normal ClassPad operation. Important! • The RAM reset operation deletes all data that is temporarily stored in Cl[...]

  • Seite 905

    20060301 2  Deleting an Application You can delete an add-in application by deleting it from the application menu or by using the [Add-In App.] Memory Usage sheet of the System application as described in Chapter 16. The following procedure shows how to delete an add-in application from the application menu only. For information about using t[...]

  • Seite 906

    20060301 3 P o wer Supply Your ClassPad is powered by four AAA-size batteries LR03 (AM4). The battery level indicator is displayed in the status bar. ........................ full ..................... medium ....................... low Important! • Be sure to replace batteries as soon as possible whenever the battery level indicator shows (mediu[...]

  • Seite 907

    20060301 k   Replacing Batteries Precautions: Incorrectly using batteries can cause them to burst or leak, possibly damaging the interior of the ClassPad. Note the following precautions: • Be sure that the positive (+) and negative (–) poles of each battery are facing in the proper directions. • Never mix batteries of different types. •[...]

  • Seite 908

    20060301 P (3) Remove the battery cover from the ClassPad by pulling with your finger at the point marked 1 . (6) Replace the battery cover. (7) Turn the ClassPad front side up and remove its front cover. (8) Align the touch panel. a. Your ClassPad should turn on automatically and display the Touch Panel Alignment screen. b. Tap the center of each[...]

  • Seite 909

    20060301 (9) Adjust the display contrast. a. Tap the button to make contrast darker, or the button to make it lighter. b. After the contrast setting is the way you want, tap [Set]. • Tapping [Initial] on the Contrast dialog box returns contrast to its initial factory default setting. (10) Specify the display language. a. On the list that appears,[...]

  • Seite 910

    20060301 α -3-5 P ower Supply (13) Configure power properties. a. Configure the Power Save Mode and Auto Power Off settings. • See “Power Saving Mode” and “Aut o Power Off” on page16-6-1 for details about these settings. b. When the configurations are the way you want, tap [Set]. • Tapping [Cancel] selects “1 day” for [Power Sav[...]

  • Seite 911

    20060301 4  Number of Digits and Precision k   Number of Digits  Standard Mode  The following applies when the check box next to the “Decimal Calculation” item on the Basic Format dialog box is not selected. • Up to 611 digits are stored in memory for integer values. • Decimal values up to 15 digits a re converted to f[...]

  • Seite 912

    20060301 5  Specifications Calculation range: ± 1 × 10 –999 to ± 9.999999999 × 10 999 and 0. Internal operations use 15-digit mantissa. Exponential display range:   Normal 1:   10 –2 > | x |, | x | > 10 10     Normal 2:   10 –9 > | x |, | x | > 10 10 Program capacity:   515000 bytes (max.) P ower suppl[...]

  • Seite 913

    20060301 P or t: 3-pin data communication port 4-pin mini USB port • For information about FA-CP1 minimum computer system requirements, see the FA-CP1 User’s Guide. Method: Start-stop (asynchronous), full-duplex T ransmission speed (BPS): 115200/38400/9600 bits/second (normal) 38400 bits/second (Send38k/Receive38k) Parity: None Bit length: 8 bi[...]

  • Seite 914

    20020801 20060301 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 6 Character Code T able Characters from character code 257 onwards are 2-byte characters. 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 12[...]

  • Seite 915

    20020801 20060301 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 [...]

  • Seite 916

    20020801 20060301 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 [...]

  • Seite 917

    20020801 20060301 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 [...]

  • Seite 918

    20060301 7 System V ariable T able Name Description Input Delete Data Type Default a 0 Sequence Variable  – EXPR (Real Number) 0 a 1 Sequence Variable  – EXPR (Real Number) 0 a 2 Sequence Variable  – EXPR (Real Number) 0 a Coef Regression Coefficient a – – EXPR (Real Number) ac Seq Sequence Graph Trace Variable – – EXPR (Rea[...]

  • Seite 919

    20060301 Name Description Input Delete Data Type Default b n E Sequence Expression   STR b n E 0 Recursion Internal Variable – – EXPR (Real Number) b n Start Sequence Variable  – EXPR (Real Number) 0 c 0 Sequence Variable  – EXPR (Real Number) 0 c 1 Sequence Variable  – EXPR (Real Number) 0 c 2 Sequence Variable  – EXP[...]

  • Seite 920

    20060301 Name Description Input Delete Data Type Default GconHStart Graph Transformation Vertical Start Point – – EXPR (Real Number) 1 GconHStep Graph Transformation Vertical Step Value – – EXPR (Real Number) 1 GconWEnd Graph Transformation Horizontal End Point – – EXPR (Real Number) 5 GconWStart Graph Transformation Horizontal Start Po[...]

  • Seite 921

    20060301 Name Description Input Delete Data Type Default ModeFStat Frequency of Mode Values (Statistics Calculation) – – EXPR (Real Number) ModeNStat Number of Mode Values (Statistics Calculation) – – EXPR (Real Number) ModeStat Mode Value (Statistics Calculation) – – LIST {Real Number} MSe Mean Square Error for Regression – – EXPR [...]

  • Seite 922

    20060301 α -7-5 System V ariable T able Name Description Input Delete Data Type Default SqResult Sequence Result Variable – – MAT SqStart Sequence Creation Variable  – EXPR (Real Number) 1 Sres11 Calculation Result for StatGraph1 – – LIST {Real Number} Sres12 Calculation Result for StatGraph1 – – LIST {Real Number} Sres21 Calculat[...]

  • Seite 923

    20060301 α -7-6 System V ariable T able Name Description Input Delete Data Type Default x Inv Result of Inverse Cumulative Distribution Calculations – – EXPR(Real Number) o 1 Mean of Data 1 – – EXPR (Real Number) x 1( y )~ x 100( y ) Graph Expression Input Variable, X= Type  ( Define )  FUNC x 1 InvN Result of InvNorm Calculation ?[...]

  • Seite 924

    20060301 α -7-7 System V ariable T able Name Description Input Delete Data Type Default ymax View Window Display Range y -axis Maximum Value  – EXPR (Real Number) 3.8 ymax3D 3D Graph View Window Display Range y -axis Maximum Value  – EXPR (Real Number) 3 ymin View Window Display Range y -axis Minimum Value  – EXPR (Real Number) –3[...]

  • Seite 925

    20080201 8 Command and Function Index α -8-1 Command and Function Index Command/Function Form Page Command/Function Form Page abExpR Cmd 12-6-32 abExpReg Cmd 12-6-27 abs Func 2-4-5 absExpand Func 2-8-45  and Cmd 2-8-46 andConnect Func 2-8-45 angle Func 2-8-40 approx Func 2-8-3 arcLen Func 2-8-16 arg Func 2-8-19 arrange Func 2-8-47 augment Func [...]

  • Seite 926

    20080201 α -8-2 Command and Function Index Command/Function Form Page Command/Function Form Page DispSmryTbl Cmd 12-6-16 DispStat Cmd 2-8-55, 12-6-28 DispText Cmd 12-6-6 Distance Cmd 12-6-16 dms Func 2-8-7 Do~LpWhile Cmd 12-6-9 Dot Cmd 12-6-32 dotP Func 2-8-40 DrawConics Cmd 12-6-25 DrawFTGCon, DrawFTGPlot Cmd 12-6-16 DrawGraph Cmd 12-6-17 DrawSeq[...]

  • Seite 927

    20080201 α -8-3 Command and Function Index Command/Function Form Page Command/Function Form Page InvGeoCD Cmd 7-11-22 invGeoCDf Func 2-8-54 invLaplace Func 2-8-8 InvNorm Cmd 7-11-5 InvNormCD Cmd 7-11-5 invNormCDf Func 2-8-49 InvPoissonCD Cmd 7-11-20 invPoissonCDf Func 2-8-53 InvTCD Cmd 7-11-8 invTCDf Func 2-8-50 judge Func 2-4-9 laplace Func 2-8-8[...]

  • Seite 928

    20080201 α -8-4 Command and Function Index Command/Function Form Page Command/Function Form Page PlotChg Cmd 12-6-18 PlotOff Cmd 12-6-19 PlotOn Cmd 12-6-19 plotTest( Func 12-6-19 PoissonCD Cmd 7-11-19 poissonCDf Func 2-8-53 PoissonPD Cmd 7-11-18 poissonPDf Func 2-8-53 polyEval Func 2-8-29 PowerR Cmd 12-6-32 PowerReg Cmd 12-6-30 Print Cmd 12-6-7 Pr[...]

  • Seite 929

    20080201 α -8-5 Command and Function Index Command/Function Form Page Command/Function Form Page SetNormal Cmd 12-6-36 SetRadian Cmd 12-6-36 SetReal Cmd 12-6-36 SetSci Cmd 12-6-36 SetSequence Cmd 12-6-37 SetSimulGraph Cmd 12-6-37 SetSmryTable Cmd 12-6-37 SetSmryTableQD Cmd 12-6-37 SetStandard Cmd 12-6-37 SetStatWinAuto Cmd 12-6-37 SetTVariable Cmd[...]

  • Seite 930

    20080201 α -8-6 Command and Function Index Command/Function Form Page TwoSampleTInt Cmd 7-10-10 TwoSampleTTest Cmd 7-9-11 TwoSampleZInt Cmd 7-10-4 TwoSampleZTest Cmd 7-9-5 TwoVariable Cmd 12-6-32 TwoWayANOVA Cmd 7-9-18 unitV Func 2-8-39 Unlock Cmd 12-6-41 UnlockFolder Cmd 12-6-41 variance Func 2-8-28 Vertical Cmd 12-6-22 ViewWindow Cmd 12-6-23 Vie[...]

  • Seite 931

    20060301 α -9-1 Graph T ypes and Executab le Functions 9 Graph T ypes and Executable Functions  : Executable − : Not executable D : Executable with some conditions Zoom Graph T ype Function Analysis Sketch G-Solve Modify Box In Out Auto Original Square Round Integer Previous Quick T ypes T race Cls Plot Line T ext Normal Inverse Circle Vertic[...]

  • Seite 932

    20060301 α -9-2 Graph T ypes and Executab le Functions Zoom Graph T ype Function Analysis Sketch G-Solve Modify Box In Out Auto Original Square Round Integer Previous Quick T ypes T race Cls Plot Line T ext Normal Inverse Circle Vertical Horizontal Root Max Min Intersect Inflection Distance π ∫ f ( x ) 2 d x ∫ d x x -cal y -cal y -Intercept T[...]

  • Seite 933

    20060301 α -9-3 Graph T ypes and Executab le Functions • Histogram • Broken Zoom Graph T ype Function Analysis Sketch G-Solve Modify Box In Out Auto Original Square Round Integer Previous Quick T ypes T race Cls Plot Line T ext Normal Inverse Circle Vertical Horizontal Root Max Min Intersect Inflection Distance π ∫ f ( x ) 2 d x ∫ d x x -[...]

  • Seite 934

    20060301 α -9-4 Graph T ypes and Executab le Functions Statistical - Box • MedBox • ModBox Zoom Graph T ype Function Analysis Sketch G-Solve Modify Box In Out Auto Original Square Round Integer Previous Quick T ypes T race Cls Plot Line T ext Normal Inverse Circle Vertical Horizontal Root Max Min Intersect Inflection Distance π ∫ f ( x ) 2 [...]

  • Seite 935

    20060301 α -10-1 Error Message T able 10 Error Messa g e T able k Error Messa g e T able Error Message Description A single presentation can contain up to 60 pages. – Access to Flash ROM – Argument must be a variable name – Can’t Create – Can’t Delete – Can’t Edit – Can’t Rename – Can’t Transform into This Type – Circular[...]

  • Seite 936

    20060301 α -10-2 Error Message T able Error Message Description Folder The folder name you specified for a command argument does not exist. Or you have input the name of a folder that cannot be specified (“library” folder, etc.) Function has invalid variable name – Function Type The expression type that is selected cannot execute a functio[...]

  • Seite 937

    20060301 α -10-3 Error Message T able Error Message Description Invalid Outside Function or Program You are trying to execute a command that must be used inside of a program as a local command, outside of a program. Invalid Path You are trying to specify an invalid path. This error occurs when you include a system folder in a path, when you includ[...]

  • Seite 938

    20060301 α -10-4 Error Message T able Error Message Description Non-Real in Calc The ClassPad is in the Real mode but   the value you are inputting or the result produced by a calculation is a complex number. Not a Local Variable The variable you are trying to assign data to is not a local variable. Not a Numerical Value Result – Not an Empty [...]

  • Seite 939

    20060301 k W arning Message T able α -10-5 Error Message T able k Low Memory Error Pr ocessing An error occurs on the ClassPad if it is unable to reserve enough work area memory to perform a particular operation. When a low memory error occurs, any application in use at that point is shut down and an error message like the one shown below appea[...]

  • Seite 940

    This mark applies in EU countries only. Manufacturer: CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. 6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan Responsible within the European Union: CASIO EUROPE GmbH Bornbarch 10 22848 Norderstedt, Germany[...]

  • Seite 941

    CASIO COMPUTER CO ., L TD . 6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome Shibuya-ku, T okyo 151-8543, Japan One or more of the following patents may be used in the pr oduct. U.S.Pats. 5,539,867 SA0802-A[...]